1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 European Computer Modern
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12907 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12926 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12927 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 community in order to replace
12962 as the default font.
12963 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12964 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 One difference is improved kerning.
12989 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 If you do not like the look of
12998 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13019 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13020 \begin_inset space ~
13023 serif and typewriter fonts,
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13044 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13061 \begin_inset space \space{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13085 but you can also select your own.
13086 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 The differences between roman,
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 fonts are explained in section
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13108 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13124 was originally designed for newspapers.
13125 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13126 into the small newspaper columns.
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13152 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13157 depends on the class you are using.
13158 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13162 Note that the font size is the
13167 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13168 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13169 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13170 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13207 serif or typewriter.
13212 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13222 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13230 LaTeX font encoding
13232 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13261 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13262 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13272 Use Old Style Figures
13276 Use True Small Caps
13279 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13282 Use Old Style Figures
13284 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13286 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13294 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13298 Use True Small Caps
13300 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13301 of scaled capitals.
13302 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13303 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13311 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13312 a font to display the script characters.
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 \begin_inset Index idx
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13333 So this has no effect for the document language
13349 \begin_layout Standard
13352 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13354 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13355 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13361 \begin_inset Index idx
13364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13366 packages ! microtype
13374 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13376 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13380 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13392 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13397 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13398 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13400 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13405 dialog, see section
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13412 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13424 \begin_layout Subsection
13428 \begin_layout Standard
13429 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13430 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13432 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13433 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13434 choose a math font in the dialog
13436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13440 \begin_inset Index idx
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 Document ! Settings
13450 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13451 automatically selects a math font.
13452 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13453 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13473 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13474 document font is available.
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13478 Note that the math font will not be used for
13482 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13488 or by the insertion of the command
13495 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13500 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13501 while the math characters do not.
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13506 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13509 \begin_inset space ~
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13522 in the document font settings.
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13527 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13528 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13529 font (in most cases
13530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13536 \begin_inset space ~
13542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13545 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13546 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13554 \begin_inset space ~
13560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13566 \begin_layout Subsection
13567 Using Different Character Styles
13568 \begin_inset Index idx
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13578 \begin_inset Index idx
13581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13592 automatically changes the character style for certain
13593 paragraph environments.
13595 supports two character styles,
13604 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13613 style, do one of the following:
13616 \begin_layout Itemize
13617 click on the toolbar button
13626 \begin_layout Itemize
13627 use the key binding
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 These commands are all toggles.
13642 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13645 \begin_layout Standard
13646 One typically uses the
13650 style for proper names.
13652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13659 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13668 A more widely used character style is the
13673 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13680 \begin_layout Itemize
13681 clicking on the toolbar button
13690 \begin_layout Itemize
13691 using the keybindings
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13705 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13707 use a different font.
13710 \begin_layout Standard
13711 We've been using the
13715 style all over the place in this document.
13716 Here's one more example:
13719 \begin_layout Quotation
13722 Do not overuse character styles!
13725 \begin_layout Standard
13726 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13727 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13728 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13729 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13742 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13747 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13753 arg "dialog-show character"
13759 \begin_layout Subsection
13760 Fine-Tuning with the
13765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13767 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13772 \begin_inset Index idx
13775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13785 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13787 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13788 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13789 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13790 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13791 from ordinary dialog.
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13795 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13796 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13797 \begin_inset Newline newline
13800 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13801 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13805 To use custom character styles, open the
13807 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13809 \begin_inset space ~
13812 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13815 dialog or press the toolbar button
13818 arg "dialog-show character"
13822 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13823 font property that you can choose.
13824 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13832 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13837 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13838 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13839 environments all at once.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13843 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13846 \begin_inset space ~
13858 \begin_layout Labeling
13859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13873 The possible options are:
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13883 This is the Roman font family.
13884 Normally a serif font.
13885 It's also the default family.
13895 \begin_layout Labeling
13896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13907 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 This is the Typewriter font family.
13933 arg "font-typewriter"
13942 \begin_layout Labeling
13943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13948 This corresponds to the print weight.
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Medium font series.
13960 It's also the default series.
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Bold font series.
13984 \begin_layout Labeling
13985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13990 As the name implies.
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is the Upright font shape.
14002 It's also the default shape.
14005 \begin_layout Labeling
14006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14020 s the Italic font shape
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This is the Slanted font shape
14036 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14037 , this is different from italic).
14040 \begin_layout Labeling
14041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14045 \begin_inset space ~
14052 This is the Small caps font shape
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14065 Alters the text color.
14066 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14075 , which means that the document default color set in
14077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14084 \begin_inset space ~
14089 is used, you can choose between
14166 \begin_inset Index idx
14169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14178 \begin_layout Labeling
14179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14185 the language of the document.
14186 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14187 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14189 \begin_inset Newline newline
14192 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14194 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14195 When using the spell checking (see section
14196 \begin_inset space ~
14200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14202 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14206 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14209 \begin_layout Labeling
14210 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 Alters the size of the font.
14216 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14217 proportional to the document font size.
14218 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14219 the details, but a general description of what
14225 \begin_layout Labeling
14226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14247 arg "font-size tiny"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14331 arg "font-size small"
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14352 It's also the default size.
14356 arg "font-size normal"
14362 \begin_layout Labeling
14363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14384 arg "font-size large"
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 arg "font-size larger"
14418 \begin_layout Labeling
14419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 arg "font-size largest"
14446 \begin_layout Labeling
14447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size huge"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size giant"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14508 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size increase"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 arg "font-size decrease"
14567 \begin_layout Standard
14572 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14573 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14575 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14576 — use those instead.
14577 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14580 \begin_layout Labeling
14581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14586 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14591 \begin_layout Labeling
14592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 This is text with emphasize on
14602 This might seem like the same as
14606 , but it is actually a bit different.
14612 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14614 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 This is text with Underbar on.
14631 arg "font-underline"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14642 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14643 when you could not change fonts.
14644 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14645 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14646 because some people
14650 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 \begin_inset space ~
14665 This is text with Double underbar on.
14671 arg "font-underunderline"
14675 \begin_inset Newline newline
14678 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14679 about double underbar.
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 \begin_inset space ~
14694 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14700 arg "font-underwave"
14704 \begin_inset Newline newline
14707 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14708 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14723 This is text with Strikeout on.
14729 arg "font-strikeout"
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14736 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14737 changed in the meantime.
14740 \begin_layout Labeling
14741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14745 \begin_inset space ~
14752 This is text with Cross out on.
14755 \begin_inset Newline newline
14758 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14761 \begin_layout Labeling
14762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14769 This is text with Noun on.
14776 , this is a logical attribute.
14777 Normally it's equivalent to
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14791 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14804 arg "dialog-show character"
14807 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14808 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14811 arg "textstyle-apply"
14815 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14819 \begin_layout Standard
14820 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14827 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14828 (suppose you just set the shape to
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14847 \begin_inset space ~
14859 \begin_layout Standard
14860 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_layout Itemize
14886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14893 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 \begin_inset Newline newline
14915 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14929 \begin_inset Note Note
14932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 For more on phantoms see section
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14940 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14950 \begin_inset Newline newline
14956 \begin_layout Itemize
14961 fonts use characters with serifs.
14962 These are the small
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14970 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14971 The following example shows the difference:
14972 \begin_inset Newline newline
14976 \begin_inset Newline newline
14981 text without serifs
14984 \begin_inset Newline newline
14987 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14988 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14995 \begin_layout Itemize
15000 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15001 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15002 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15005 \begin_layout Standard
15006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15013 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15014 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15022 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15023 the property to be removed.
15024 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15025 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15026 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15044 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15045 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15057 \begin_inset space ~
15062 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15073 If you, for example, set
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15092 \begin_inset space ~
15097 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15110 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15111 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15114 \begin_layout Section
15115 Printing and Previewing
15118 \begin_layout Subsection
15122 \begin_layout Standard
15123 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15124 using \SpecialChar LyX
15125 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15126 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15127 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15128 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15130 Additional Features
15135 \begin_layout Standard
15137 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15140 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15141 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15142 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15145 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15146 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15147 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15148 to turn your writing into printable output.
15149 This happens in two stages:
15152 \begin_layout Enumerate
15153 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15154 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15156 a file with the extension,
15157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 \begin_layout Enumerate
15172 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15173 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15174 to use the commands in the
15178 file to produce printable output.
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15182 Output file formats
15183 \begin_inset Index idx
15186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15195 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15203 Simple text (ASCII)
15204 \begin_inset Index idx
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15208 File formats ! ASCII
15216 \begin_layout Standard
15217 This file type has the extension
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15230 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15241 \begin_layout Standard
15242 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15244 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15245 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15247 \begin_inset space ~
15253 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15254 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15255 bibliography (section
15256 \begin_inset space ~
15260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15262 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15267 If your document includes such material, use
15269 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15270 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15272 \begin_inset space ~
15276 \begin_inset space ~
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15298 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15299 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15305 \begin_inset Index idx
15308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15309 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15318 \begin_layout Standard
15319 This file type has the extension
15320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15335 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15336 -Errors or to process it manually
15337 with console commands.
15338 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15340 's temporary directory whenever you
15341 view or export your document.
15344 \begin_layout Standard
15345 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15346 -file using the menu
15348 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15349 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15354 export variants are explained in section
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15361 reference "subsec:Export"
15368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15370 \begin_inset Index idx
15373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 \begin_layout Standard
15383 This file type has the extension
15384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15404 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15405 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15406 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15412 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15413 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15414 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15415 when you view the DVI.
15416 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15419 \begin_layout Standard
15420 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15422 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15423 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15429 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15437 The latter option uses the program
15439 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15445 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15448 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15449 font access (see section
15450 \begin_inset space ~
15454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15456 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15461 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15462 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15473 File formats ! PostScript
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 This file type has the extension
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 PostScript was developed by the company
15499 as a printer language.
15500 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15502 PostScript can be seen as a
15503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15506 programming language
15507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15510 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15527 packages ! pstricks
15537 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15541 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 Encapsulated PostScript
15546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 (EPS, file extension
15550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15562 As \SpecialChar LyX
15563 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15564 convert them in the background to EPS.
15565 If, for example, you have 50
15566 \begin_inset space ~
15569 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15571 \begin_inset space ~
15574 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15575 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15577 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15578 EPS to avoid this problem.
15581 \begin_layout Standard
15582 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15584 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15585 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15593 \begin_inset Index idx
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 \begin_inset Index idx
15606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 \begin_layout Standard
15616 This file type has the extension
15617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 Portable Document Format
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15641 was derived from PostScript.
15642 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15652 looks exactly the same.
15655 \begin_layout Standard
15656 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15660 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 (JPG, file extension
15665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15692 Portable Network Graphics
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 (PNG, file extension
15697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15710 converts them in the
15711 background to one of these formats.
15712 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15713 will slow down your workflow.
15714 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15717 \begin_layout Standard
15718 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15726 \begin_layout Description
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15731 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15735 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15738 \begin_layout Description
15740 \begin_inset space ~
15747 ) This uses the program
15749 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15752 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15755 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15758 is a new engine, derived from
15762 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15763 access (see section
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15770 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15775 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15776 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15781 \begin_layout Description
15783 \begin_inset space ~
15790 ) This uses the program
15795 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15802 font access (see section
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15809 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15814 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15815 vertically written Japanese.
15818 \begin_layout Description
15820 \begin_inset space ~
15823 (cropped) This is the same as
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15831 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15832 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15833 to generate good-looking
15834 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15837 \begin_layout Description
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15842 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15846 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15850 \begin_layout Description
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15855 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15859 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15860 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15864 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15865 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15868 \begin_layout Standard
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15881 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15882 works without problems.
15883 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15884 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15901 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15911 \begin_inset Index idx
15914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15915 FileFormats ! XHTML
15921 \begin_inset Index idx
15924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15933 \begin_layout Standard
15934 This file type has the extension
15935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15947 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15948 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15949 When \SpecialChar LyX
15950 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15951 suitable for the purpose.
15952 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15958 between different formats, which are described in section
15960 Math Output in XHTML
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15973 \begin_layout Standard
15974 XHTML output remains
15975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15982 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15983 features are supported yet.
15987 and the World Wide Web
15991 Additional Features
15993 manual, for more information.
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15999 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16000 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16006 \begin_layout Subsection
16008 \begin_inset Index idx
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16022 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16031 or use the toolbar button
16038 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16039 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16046 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16050 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16052 \begin_inset space ~
16056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16058 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16063 Further output formats can be selected via
16065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16066 View (Other Formats)
16068 or the toolbar button
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16079 viewer window using the menu
16081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16087 Update (Other Formats)
16092 \begin_layout Standard
16093 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16096 To have a real output, export your document.
16099 \begin_layout Section
16100 A few Words about Typography
16101 \begin_inset Index idx
16104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16113 \begin_layout Subsection
16114 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16115 \begin_inset Index idx
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16125 \begin_inset Index idx
16128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 In \SpecialChar LyX
16140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16151 symbol comes in four variants: the
16168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16174 \begin_layout Standard
16175 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16185 height_special "totalheight"
16190 backgroundcolor "none"
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Tabular
16195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16200 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16229 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 system key combination
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 and the em dash with
16312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 is the Mac label for the right
16334 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16338 \begin_inset space ~
16341 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16354 and 2014 for the en dash).
16360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 system key combination or
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16469 \begin_layout Standard
16470 Dashes can also be inserted with
16472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16477 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16494 mode and has a length of its own.
16495 Here are some examples:
16498 \begin_layout Enumerate
16499 line- and page-breaks
16500 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16510 \begin_layout Enumerate
16512 \begin_inset space ~
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16527 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16538 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16553 \begin_layout Standard
16555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16557 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16558 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16566 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 Dashes and Line Breaks
16568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16570 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16578 Whether line breaks
16579 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438804
16581 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438805
16584 dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale:
16587 \begin_layout Itemize
16588 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16589 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16590 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16593 \begin_layout Itemize
16594 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16598 \begin_layout Itemize
16599 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16600 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16603 \begin_layout Standard
16605 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437551
16606 In \SpecialChar LyX
16608 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437622
16609 The dashes that are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16610 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16611 by default generally allow for
16613 line breaks after en-dashes and em-dashes
16614 \change_deleted -712698321 1513498469
16616 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437597
16618 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438851
16619 are only allowed (without manual intervention), if the option
16621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16622 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16623 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16624 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16626 is selected (this is the default in \SpecialChar LyX
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16632 In this case, the dashes are output as
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 , respectively, when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16650 The \SpecialChar TeX
16651 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16652 by an optional line break.
16662 \begin_layout Standard
16666 \begin_layout Enumerate
16668 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437637
16669 This results in optional line breaks after
16676 Unwanted line breaks
16677 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437645
16679 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437646
16682 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16689 Prevent Hyphenation
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16704 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16710 in \SpecialChar TeX
16716 \begin_layout Itemize
16718 \begin_inset space ~
16722 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16732 height_special "totalheight"
16737 backgroundcolor "none"
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16749 \begin_layout Itemize
16750 With spaced en dashes
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16759 in British English and generally recommended by
16761 The Elements of Typographic Style
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16767 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16770 \begin_layout Itemize
16774 \begin_inset space ~
16777 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16781 – sont très utiles.
16784 \begin_layout Itemize
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16803 \begin_layout Standard
16804 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16808 – in contrast to an overfull line
16809 \begin_inset space ~
16812 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16817 \begin_layout Enumerate
16819 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437701
16820 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16831 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16834 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16835 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16840 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16843 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16854 \begin_layout Enumerate
16856 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437705
16874 \begin_layout Enumerate
16876 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437950
16877 The default dashes output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16879 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437951
16881 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437954
16885 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437961
16888 in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16893 \change_inserted -712698321 1513498511
16894 you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16899 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16902 \change_inserted -712698321 1513498530
16903 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16906 In this case optional line breaks after individual
16909 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438124
16910 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16912 has not been selected, you
16915 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438126
16917 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438191
16919 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438193
16923 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438149
16924 optional line breaks
16928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16929 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16930 Optional line break
16935 \begin_layout Itemize
16936 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16937 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16942 \begin_layout Standard
16944 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440855
16945 Note: Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16947 \begin_inset space ~
16950 2.1, you could insert en-dashes and em-dashes as -- and ---, respectively;
16951 they were automatically merged to proper (breakable) dashes in the output,
16952 but kept as consecutive hyphen characters in the LyX document.
16953 If you inserted literal dash characters, however, they were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16959 dashes (this was actually rather by accident than intentionally, but some
16960 used these two forms of dashes deliberately).
16963 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16965 \begin_inset space ~
16969 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439795
16970 things work differently: consecutive hyphens are merged to dashes immediately
16975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16977 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439552
16978 The behavior was changed since it led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16980 HTML export and the PDF export.
16985 If you copy consecutive hyphens, by contrast, they are output as consecutive
16987 An unintended consequence of this change was that all dashes now were output
16988 as non-breakable dashes.
16990 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438403
16991 -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16997 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16999 \begin_inset space ~
17002 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
17004 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439864
17013 Since furthermore, in order to maintain the output,
17014 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439597
17016 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17020 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17021 of consecutive hyphens
17024 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439612
17028 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17032 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17035 \begin_inset space ~
17038 2.1 or earlier versions,
17039 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439871
17041 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439871
17044 re converted to literal
17045 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438458
17047 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17051 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17055 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17059 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439884
17060 , respectively, these were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17061 in \SpecialChar LyX
17063 \begin_inset space ~
17074 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439888
17075 An obvious drawback of all this was that
17076 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438506
17078 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17080 \change_deleted -712698321 1513440124
17082 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440127
17085 different line breaks in some documents.
17088 \begin_inset space ~
17092 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439906
17093 , by contrast and as outlined above, outputs
17096 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441767
17101 dashes by default, so if you load a document saved previous to LyX 2.2,
17102 you should get the identical output with LyX 2.3 for the dashes inserted
17104 Furthermore, \SpecialChar LyX
17106 \begin_inset space ~
17111 provides the aforementioned option
17112 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438447
17115 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
17116 \change_inserted -712698321 1513498544
17117 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17129 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438517
17131 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441759
17135 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438522
17138 selected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17140 \begin_inset space ~
17144 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441759
17145 in order to maintain line breaking between \SpecialChar LyX
17146 2.2 and 2.3 (so these document
17147 have non-breakable dashes)
17150 \begin_inset Newline newline
17153 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
17157 \begin_layout Itemize
17159 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440192
17162 literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17164 \begin_inset space ~
17167 2.2 documents, you must manually
17168 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438688
17172 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438687
17175 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
17176 \change_inserted -712698321 1513498551
17177 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17181 to ensure unchanged behavior.
17185 \begin_layout Itemize
17187 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441852
17191 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441864
17193 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441867
17196 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17198 \begin_inset space ~
17201 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17202 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavio
17203 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441864
17209 \begin_layout Itemize
17210 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
17211 documents that follow literal
17212 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
17214 \begin_inset space ~
17218 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
17219 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
17221 \begin_inset space ~
17224 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
17227 \begin_layout Subsection
17229 \begin_inset Index idx
17232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17241 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17248 \begin_layout Standard
17249 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17250 but automatically in the output.
17251 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17257 \begin_inset Index idx
17260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17267 following the rules of the document language.
17270 \begin_layout Standard
17272 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17276 font and with unusual constructs, like
17277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17285 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17286 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17287 This is done with the menu
17289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17290 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17298 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17300 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17304 \begin_layout Standard
17305 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17306 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17317 would then see the hyphen
17318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17325 as a hyphenation possibility.
17326 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17327 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17331 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17334 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17336 Prevent Hyphenation
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17349 \begin_layout Subsection
17351 \begin_inset Index idx
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17364 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17367 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17374 \begin_layout Standard
17375 When \SpecialChar LyX
17376 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17377 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17379 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17385 appropriate amount of space.
17386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17389 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17391 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17392 gets after another word.
17395 \begin_layout Standard
17396 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17397 not work in all cases.
17399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17410 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17411 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17414 \begin_layout Standard
17415 Here are some examples of
17419 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17422 \begin_layout Itemize
17427 \begin_layout Itemize
17432 \begin_layout Standard
17433 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17436 \begin_layout Itemize
17438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17442 this is too much space!
17445 \begin_layout Itemize
17450 \begin_layout Standard
17451 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17458 \begin_layout Enumerate
17462 \begin_inset space ~
17467 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17474 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17479 \begin_inset Index idx
17482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17483 Spaces ! inter-word
17491 \begin_layout Enumerate
17495 \begin_inset space ~
17500 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17501 \begin_inset space ~
17505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17507 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17512 \begin_inset Index idx
17515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17524 \begin_layout Enumerate
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset space ~
17543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17545 \begin_inset space ~
17550 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17551 This function is also bound to
17554 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17560 \begin_layout Standard
17561 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17564 \begin_layout Itemize
17566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17570 \begin_inset space \space{}
17573 this is too much space!
17576 \begin_layout Itemize
17577 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17581 \begin_layout Standard
17582 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17583 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17585 will take care of this.
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17589 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17593 \begin_inset space ~
17599 feature described in the section
17601 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17606 Additional Features
17611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17613 \begin_inset Index idx
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 Typography ! Quotation marks
17623 \begin_inset Index idx
17626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17627 Quotation marks | see
17631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 \begin_layout Standard
17659 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17660 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17661 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17671 The keyboard character,
17675 , generates this automatically.
17678 \begin_layout Standard
17679 You can specify what character the
17683 key produces by using the submenu
17689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17693 \begin_inset Index idx
17696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17697 Document ! Settings
17702 dialog and switching the
17706 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17707 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17709 \begin_inset space ~
17715 \begin_layout Labeling
17716 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17728 \begin_inset space ~
17732 \begin_inset space ~
17736 \begin_inset Quotes els
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17754 \begin_inset Quotes els
17758 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17761 quotation marks (as common, e.
17762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17768 \begin_layout Labeling
17769 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17772 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17776 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17780 \begin_inset space ~
17784 \begin_inset space ~
17788 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17792 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17798 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17802 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17810 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17813 quotation marks (as common, e.
17814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17820 \begin_layout Labeling
17821 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17824 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17832 \begin_inset space ~
17836 \begin_inset space ~
17840 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17844 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17850 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17854 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17858 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17862 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17865 quotation marks (as common, e.
17866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17872 \begin_layout Labeling
17873 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17876 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17880 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17888 \begin_inset space ~
17892 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17896 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17902 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17906 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17910 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17914 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17917 quotation marks (as common, e.
17918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17924 \begin_layout Labeling
17925 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17928 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17932 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17936 \begin_inset space ~
17940 \begin_inset space ~
17944 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17948 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17954 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17958 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17962 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17966 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17969 quotation marks (as common, e.
17970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17973 g., in Switzerland)
17976 \begin_layout Labeling
17977 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17980 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17984 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17988 \begin_inset space ~
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17996 \begin_inset Quotes als
18000 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18006 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18010 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18014 \begin_inset Quotes als
18018 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18021 quotation marks (as common, e.
18022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18028 \begin_layout Labeling
18029 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18032 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18036 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18040 \begin_inset space ~
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18052 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18058 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18062 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18066 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18070 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18073 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18076 \begin_layout Labeling
18077 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18080 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18084 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18096 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18100 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18106 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18110 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18114 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18118 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18121 quotation marks (as common, e.
18122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18125 g., in Great Britain)
18128 \begin_layout Labeling
18129 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18132 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18136 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18140 \begin_inset space ~
18144 \begin_inset space ~
18148 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18152 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18158 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18162 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18166 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18170 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18173 quotation marks (as common, e.
18174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18180 \begin_layout Labeling
18181 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18184 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18188 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18192 \begin_inset space ~
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18204 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18210 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18214 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18218 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18222 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18225 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18231 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18232 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18233 the inner marks differ).
18241 \begin_layout Labeling
18242 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18245 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18249 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18253 \begin_inset space ~
18257 \begin_inset space ~
18261 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18265 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18271 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18275 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18279 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18283 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18286 quotation marks (as common, e.
18287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18293 \begin_layout Labeling
18294 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18297 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18301 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18305 \begin_inset space ~
18309 \begin_inset space ~
18313 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18317 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18323 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18327 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18331 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18335 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18338 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18341 \begin_layout Labeling
18342 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18343 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18351 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18357 \begin_inset space ~
18361 \begin_inset space ~
18367 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18375 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18379 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18383 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18387 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18391 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18394 quotation marks (as common, e.
18395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18404 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18412 \begin_layout Labeling
18413 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18414 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18422 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18428 \begin_inset space ~
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18438 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18446 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18450 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18458 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18462 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18465 quotation marks (as common, e.
18466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18469 g., in North Korea and China)
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18474 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18475 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18483 \begin_layout Standard
18484 Inner quotation marks
18488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18490 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18491 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18499 does not necessarily mean
18500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18508 This is why we call them
18509 \begin_inset Quotes els
18513 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18529 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18531 \begin_inset Quotes els
18535 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18538 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18541 arg "quote-insert inner"
18546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18552 \begin_layout Standard
18553 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18554 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18555 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18556 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18557 If you check the setting
18559 Use dynamic quotation marks
18563 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18564 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18567 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18568 they appear in a special color).
18569 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18570 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18575 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18578 \begin_layout Standard
18579 Individual quotation marks (i.
18580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18583 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18584 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18588 \begin_layout Subsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Ligatures
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18634 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18641 \begin_layout Standard
18642 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18643 print them as single characters.
18644 These groups are known as
18649 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18650 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18652 Here are the standard ligatures:
18655 \begin_layout Itemize
18659 \begin_layout Itemize
18663 \begin_layout Itemize
18667 \begin_layout Itemize
18671 \begin_layout Itemize
18675 \begin_layout Standard
18676 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18679 \begin_layout Standard
18680 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18681 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18689 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18705 To break a ligature, use
18707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18710 \begin_inset space ~
18717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18728 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18745 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18753 \begin_layout Subsection
18755 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 \begin_inset Index idx
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 \begin_layout Standard
18773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18774 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18778 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18781 \begin_layout Description
18783 The name of the game.
18786 \begin_layout Description
18788 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18792 \begin_layout Description
18794 The \SpecialChar TeX
18795 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18799 \begin_layout Description
18800 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18801 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18805 \begin_layout Standard
18806 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18812 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18820 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18821 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18822 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18823 converges to the number
18824 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18827 : The actual version is
18828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18836 , the previous one was
18837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18848 \begin_layout Subsection
18850 \begin_inset Index idx
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18862 \begin_layout Standard
18863 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18864 space between two words.
18865 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18875 for units use the menu
18877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18878 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18880 \begin_inset space ~
18888 arg "space-insert thin"
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18895 Here is an example to show the differences:
18898 \begin_layout Standard
18899 \begin_inset Tabular
18900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18901 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18903 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18910 \begin_inset space ~
18914 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 space between number and unit
18933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18942 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18954 half space between number and unit
18967 \begin_layout Subsection
18969 \begin_inset Index idx
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18973 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18981 \begin_layout Standard
18982 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18984 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18985 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18986 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18987 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18988 These bits of text became known as
18999 \begin_layout Standard
19000 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19001 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19002 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19003 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19004 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19005 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19006 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19007 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19008 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19009 \begin_inset Newline newline
19017 \begin_inset Newline newline
19025 \begin_inset Newline newline
19028 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19029 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19030 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19032 \begin_inset space ~
19036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19038 key "latexcompanion"
19044 \begin_inset space ~
19048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19055 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19056 's page break mechanism.
19059 \begin_layout Chapter
19060 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19063 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19070 \begin_layout Standard
19071 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19074 \begin_inset space ~
19080 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19083 \begin_layout Section
19085 \begin_inset Index idx
19088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19104 \begin_layout Standard
19106 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19109 \begin_layout Description
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19115 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19116 \begin_inset Newline newline
19120 \begin_inset Note Note
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19132 \begin_layout Description
19133 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19134 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19135 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19138 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19139 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19147 \begin_inset Newline newline
19151 \begin_inset Note Comment
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19155 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19164 \begin_layout Description
19166 \begin_inset space ~
19169 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19170 set in the document settings under
19172 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19180 \begin_inset Newline newline
19184 \begin_inset Newline newline
19188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19198 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19203 of a comment that appears in the output.
19209 \begin_inset Newline newline
19213 \begin_inset Newline newline
19216 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19219 \begin_layout Standard
19220 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19232 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19235 \begin_layout Section
19237 \begin_inset Index idx
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19249 name "sec:Footnotes"
19256 \begin_layout Standard
19258 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19264 or the toolbar button
19267 arg "footnote-insert"
19279 \begin_inset Graphics
19280 filename clipart/footnote.png
19289 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19290 's representation of your footnote.
19300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19319 label, the box will
19323 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19324 Clicking on the box label again will close
19337 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19338 and click on the footnote
19353 \begin_layout Standard
19354 Here is an example footnote:
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19363 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19371 \begin_layout Standard
19372 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19373 position where the footnote box is placed.
19374 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19375 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19376 according to the document class.
19378 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19379 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19385 ey are described in the
19388 \begin_inset space ~
19396 \begin_layout Section
19398 \begin_inset Index idx
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19410 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19417 \begin_layout Standard
19418 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19420 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19429 or the toolbar button
19432 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19458 appearing within your text.
19459 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19460 's representation of your margin
19469 \begin_layout Standard
19470 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19474 \begin_inset Marginal
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19479 This is a marginal note.
19487 \begin_layout Standard
19488 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19489 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19490 pages, right on odd pages.
19493 \begin_layout Standard
19494 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19497 \begin_inset space ~
19505 \begin_inset space ~
19513 \begin_layout Section
19514 Graphics and Images
19515 \begin_inset Index idx
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_inset Index idx
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19537 name "sec:Graphics"
19544 \begin_layout Standard
19545 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19546 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19549 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19558 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19561 \begin_layout Standard
19562 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19567 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19568 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19570 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19571 \begin_inset space ~
19575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19577 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19584 \begin_layout Standard
19589 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19590 of the image in the output.
19591 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19595 \begin_inset space ~
19599 \begin_inset space ~
19608 \begin_inset space ~
19612 \begin_inset space ~
19616 \begin_inset space ~
19621 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19622 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19630 \begin_layout Standard
19634 \begin_inset space ~
19638 \begin_inset space ~
19643 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19644 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19646 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19651 \begin_inset space ~
19656 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19657 with the image size is printed.
19660 \begin_layout Standard
19661 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19662 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19664 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19667 \begin_layout Standard
19669 \begin_inset Graphics
19670 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19678 \begin_layout Standard
19679 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19680 the image into a float, see section
19681 \begin_inset space ~
19685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19687 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19694 \begin_layout Subsection
19696 \begin_inset Index idx
19699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19708 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19715 \begin_layout Standard
19716 You can insert images in any known file format.
19717 But as we explained in section
19718 \begin_inset space ~
19722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19724 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19728 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19730 therefore uses the program
19734 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19735 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19736 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19737 \begin_inset space ~
19741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19743 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19750 \begin_layout Standard
19751 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19754 \begin_layout Description
19756 \begin_inset space ~
19759 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19760 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19761 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19765 Graphics Interchange Format
19766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19769 (GIF, file extension
19770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19782 \begin_inset Index idx
19785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19817 Portable Network Graphics
19818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19821 (PNG, file extension
19822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19834 \begin_inset Index idx
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19869 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19873 (JPG, file extension
19874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19898 \begin_inset Index idx
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 \begin_layout Description
19934 \begin_inset space ~
19937 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19939 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19940 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19941 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19942 \begin_inset Newline newline
19945 Scalable image formats can be
19946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19949 Scalable Vector Graphics
19950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19953 (SVG, file extension
19954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19966 \begin_inset Index idx
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20001 Encapsulated PostScript
20002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20005 (EPS, file extension
20006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20018 \begin_inset Index idx
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20053 Portable Document Format
20054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20057 (PDF, file extension
20058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20070 \begin_inset Index idx
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20088 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20089 result will not be scalable.
20090 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20104 \begin_layout Standard
20105 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20112 \begin_layout Subsection
20113 Grouping of Image Settings
20114 \begin_inset Index idx
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 Images ! Settings grouping
20126 \begin_layout Standard
20127 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20129 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20130 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20132 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20133 need to manually change each of them.
20137 \begin_layout Standard
20138 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20145 \begin_inset space ~
20157 \begin_inset space ~
20161 \begin_inset space ~
20167 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20168 and checking the name of the desired group.
20171 \begin_layout Section
20173 \begin_inset Index idx
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20193 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20196 arg "tabular-insert"
20201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20205 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20206 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20207 from the rest of the table.
20208 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20209 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20211 Here is an example table:
20214 \begin_layout Standard
20216 \begin_inset Tabular
20217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20218 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20221 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20222 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 \begin_layout Subsection
20426 \begin_layout Standard
20427 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20430 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20434 This brings up the table dialog.
20435 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20436 cursor is placed currently.
20437 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20438 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20439 done on all of your selection.
20442 \begin_layout Standard
20443 In addition to the table dialog, the
20446 \begin_inset space ~
20451 helps you in setting table properties.
20452 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20455 \begin_layout Standard
20459 \begin_inset space ~
20464 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20465 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20466 current cell respectively.
20467 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20469 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20470 of text, see section
20471 \begin_inset space ~
20475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20477 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20484 \begin_layout Standard
20485 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20486 using the check box
20495 This will merge the cells to
20499 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20500 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20501 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20502 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20503 in the last row without the upper border:
20506 \begin_layout Standard
20508 \begin_inset Tabular
20509 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20510 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20512 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20513 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20534 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 \begin_layout Standard
20646 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20647 -arguments for the table.
20648 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20649 explained in the chapter
20656 \begin_inset space ~
20662 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20663 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20664 but are visible in the output.
20667 \begin_layout Standard
20668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 Most DVI-viewers are
20680 able to display rotations.
20688 \begin_layout Standard
20693 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20698 adds lines for all cell borders.
20701 \begin_layout Subsection
20703 \begin_inset Index idx
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 Tables ! Multi-page
20713 \begin_inset Index idx
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 \begin_layout Standard
20726 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20729 \begin_inset space ~
20733 \begin_inset space ~
20741 \begin_inset space ~
20746 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20747 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20750 \begin_layout Description
20755 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20756 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20757 Except for the first page, if
20760 \begin_inset space ~
20768 \begin_layout Description
20772 \begin_inset space ~
20777 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20778 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20781 \begin_layout Description
20786 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20787 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20788 except for the last page, if
20791 \begin_inset space ~
20799 \begin_layout Description
20803 \begin_inset space ~
20808 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20809 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20812 \begin_layout Description
20813 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20814 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20820 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20823 \begin_inset space ~
20831 \begin_layout Standard
20832 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20833 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20834 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20840 In this context, first means first in this order:
20843 \begin_inset space ~
20855 \begin_inset space ~
20860 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20863 \begin_layout Standard
20865 \begin_inset Tabular
20866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20867 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20868 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20869 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20870 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20871 <row endfirsthead="true">
20872 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20883 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <row endfirsthead="true">
20903 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <row endhead="true">
20936 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <row endhead="true">
20967 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <row endfoot="true">
21000 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 <row endlastfoot="true">
22982 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 \begin_layout Subsection
23021 \begin_inset Index idx
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23033 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23040 \begin_layout Standard
23041 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23042 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23043 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23044 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23048 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23051 \begin_layout Standard
23052 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23053 for the column in the table dialog.
23054 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23055 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23059 \begin_layout Standard
23061 \begin_inset Tabular
23062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23065 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23155 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 This is longer now.
23216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23267 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23268 This is longer now.
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 \begin_layout Standard
23300 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23301 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23307 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23313 Selection with the mouse or with
23317 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23318 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23319 the selection from outside the table.
23322 \begin_layout Section
23324 \begin_inset Index idx
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23343 \begin_layout Subsection
23347 \begin_layout Standard
23348 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23349 have a fixed location.
23351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23358 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23366 \begin_inset space ~
23371 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23372 too many notes on the current page.
23375 \begin_layout Standard
23376 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23377 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23378 and pages without text.
23379 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23380 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23381 Floats are therefore numbered.
23382 Referencing is described in section
23383 \begin_inset space ~
23387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23389 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 To insert a float, use the menu
23399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23403 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23404 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23406 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23407 \begin_inset Index idx
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23417 paragraph within the float.
23418 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23419 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23420 left-clicking on the box label.
23421 A closed float box looks like this:
23422 \begin_inset Graphics
23423 filename clipart/float.png
23428 – a gray button with a red label.
23431 \begin_layout Standard
23432 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23434 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23437 \begin_layout Subsection
23439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23441 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23446 \begin_inset Index idx
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 Floats ! Figure floats
23458 \begin_layout Standard
23460 \begin_inset space ~
23464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23466 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23470 was created using the menu
23472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23473 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23479 arg "float-insert figure"
23483 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23492 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23496 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23497 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23501 \begin_inset space ~
23509 arg "layout-paragraph"
23515 \begin_layout Standard
23516 \begin_inset Float figure
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23523 \begin_inset Graphics
23524 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23539 name "fig:A-star-in"
23556 \begin_layout Standard
23557 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23558 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23569 ) and refer to it using the menu
23571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23577 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23581 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23582 vague references like
23583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23590 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23591 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23601 For more about cross-references, see section
23602 \begin_inset space ~
23606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23608 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23615 \begin_layout Standard
23616 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23617 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23618 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23619 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23620 as described in section
23621 \begin_inset space ~
23625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23627 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23633 \begin_inset space ~
23637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23639 reference "fig:Two-images"
23643 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23644 You can also set the images one below the other.
23646 \begin_inset space ~
23650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23652 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23659 reference "fig:Star"
23663 are the subfigures.
23666 \begin_layout Standard
23667 \begin_inset Float figure
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23677 \begin_inset Float figure
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23688 name "fig:Undefinable"
23700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 \begin_inset Graphics
23702 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23714 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23718 \begin_inset Float figure
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 \begin_inset Graphics
23743 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23755 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23767 name "fig:Two-images"
23784 \begin_layout Subsection
23786 \begin_inset Index idx
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 Floats ! Table floats
23798 \begin_layout Standard
23799 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23802 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23805 or the toolbar button
23808 arg "float-insert table"
23812 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23813 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23814 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23816 \begin_inset space ~
23820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23822 reference "tab:Table-float"
23829 \begin_layout Standard
23830 \begin_inset Float table
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23836 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23839 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23841 name "tab:Table-float"
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 \begin_inset Tabular
23856 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23857 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24011 \end{array}\right]$
24019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24053 \begin_layout Subsection
24055 \begin_inset Index idx
24058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 \begin_layout Standard
24069 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24070 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24071 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24073 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24081 \begin_inset space ~
24089 \begin_layout Section
24091 \begin_inset Index idx
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 \begin_layout Standard
24105 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24107 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24108 \begin_inset space \space{}
24115 \begin_layout Standard
24116 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24117 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24123 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24124 and its alignment within the page.
24127 \begin_layout Standard
24129 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24139 height_special "totalheight"
24144 backgroundcolor "none"
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 This is a minipage.
24151 The text is set in an italic style.
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24158 another formatting.
24166 \begin_layout Standard
24167 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24170 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24174 as described in section
24175 \begin_inset space ~
24179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24181 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24186 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24192 \begin_layout Standard
24193 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24203 height_special "totalheight"
24208 backgroundcolor "none"
24211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24213 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24219 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24223 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24233 height_special "totalheight"
24238 backgroundcolor "none"
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24243 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24251 \begin_layout Standard
24252 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24258 \begin_layout Standard
24259 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24261 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24268 \begin_inset space ~
24276 \begin_layout Chapter
24277 Mathematical Formulas
24278 \begin_inset Index idx
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 \begin_inset Index idx
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24322 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24329 \begin_layout Standard
24330 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24335 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24338 \begin_layout Section
24340 \begin_inset Index idx
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 \begin_layout Standard
24353 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24366 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24368 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24369 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24370 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24378 \begin_layout Standard
24379 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24383 \begin_inset space ~
24388 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24391 \begin_layout Standard
24392 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24393 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24396 \begin_layout Standard
24397 This is a line with an inline formula
24398 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24404 \begin_layout Standard
24405 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24406 paragraph, like this one:
24407 \begin_inset Formula
24414 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24417 \begin_layout Standard
24419 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24421 For example, typing
24422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24435 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24436 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24440 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24443 \begin_inset space ~
24451 \begin_layout Subsection
24452 Navigating in Formulas
24453 \begin_inset Index idx
24456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 \begin_layout Standard
24466 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24467 achieved with the arrow keys.
24469 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24470 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24475 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24476 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24480 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24484 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24487 \end{array}\right]$
24495 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24500 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24501 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24504 \begin_layout Standard
24509 , printed in this document as
24510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24514 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24521 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24522 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24523 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24528 For example, if you want
24529 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24537 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24547 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24551 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24556 , since in the latter case only the
24559 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24564 will be under the square root sign:
24565 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24571 \begin_layout Standard
24572 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24574 \begin_inset Formula
24576 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24585 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24586 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24589 \begin_layout Subsection
24593 \begin_layout Standard
24594 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24595 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24599 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24600 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24601 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24602 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24603 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24607 \begin_layout Subsection
24608 Exponents and Subscripts
24609 \begin_inset Index idx
24612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24619 \begin_inset Index idx
24622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24631 \begin_layout Standard
24632 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24635 arg "math-superscript"
24641 arg "math-subscript"
24644 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24646 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24649 , type in a formula
24652 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24662 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24668 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24672 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24678 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24684 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24693 , you have to use an extra
24697 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24698 For example, if you want
24699 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24705 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24711 Subscripts are similar: To get
24712 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24718 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24726 \begin_layout Subsection
24728 \begin_inset Index idx
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 \begin_layout Standard
24741 Create a fraction either with the command
24747 or by using the icon
24750 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24756 \begin_inset space ~
24762 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24763 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24764 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24769 To move back up, press
24774 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24775 \begin_inset Formula
24777 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24780 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24788 \begin_layout Subsection
24790 \begin_inset Index idx
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 \begin_layout Standard
24803 Roots can be created using the
24806 \begin_inset space ~
24814 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24820 arg "math-insert \\root"
24842 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24848 always produces a square root.
24851 \begin_layout Subsection
24852 Operators with Limits
24853 \begin_inset Index idx
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24863 \begin_inset Index idx
24866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24875 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24882 \begin_layout Standard
24884 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24888 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24891 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24892 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24893 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24894 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24895 The sum operator will automatically place its
24896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24903 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24905 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24909 \begin_inset Formula
24911 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24916 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24920 \begin_layout Standard
24921 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24923 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24924 behind the operator and using the menu
24926 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24927 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24929 \begin_inset space ~
24933 \begin_inset space ~
24947 \begin_layout Standard
24948 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24957 \begin_inset Index idx
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 \begin_inset Formula
24969 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24974 which will place the
24975 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24987 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24988 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24994 \begin_layout Standard
24995 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25002 Have a look at section
25003 \begin_inset space ~
25007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25009 reference "subsec:Functions"
25013 for an explanation of function macros.
25016 \begin_layout Subsection
25018 \begin_inset Index idx
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25030 \begin_layout Standard
25031 Most math symbols can be found in the
25034 \begin_inset space ~
25039 under one of several categories; including
25056 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25060 \begin_layout Standard
25061 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25062 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25063 don't have to use the
25066 \begin_inset space ~
25071 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25073 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25076 \begin_layout Subsection
25078 \begin_inset Index idx
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25091 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25097 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25103 \begin_inset space ~
25111 arg "math-insert \\space"
25115 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25116 For example, the sequence
25121 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25124 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25126 \begin_inset Graphics
25127 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25132 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25133 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25134 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25135 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25136 , because they are negative
25138 Here are two examples:
25141 \begin_layout Standard
25151 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25157 \begin_layout Standard
25167 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25173 \begin_layout Subsection
25175 \begin_inset Index idx
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25187 name "subsec:Functions"
25194 \begin_layout Standard
25198 \begin_inset space ~
25203 contains under the button
25206 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25209 a number of function macros, such as
25210 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25222 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25229 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25230 avoid confusions, because
25231 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25235 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25241 \begin_layout Standard
25242 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25244 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25248 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25254 \begin_layout Standard
25255 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25256 are placed, as described in section
25257 \begin_inset space ~
25261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25263 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25270 \begin_layout Subsection
25272 \begin_inset Index idx
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25284 \begin_layout Standard
25285 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25287 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25288 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25289 commands, for example, to enter
25290 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25293 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25294 Our example is entered by typing
25299 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25306 \begin_inset space ~
25310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25312 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25316 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25319 \begin_layout Standard
25320 \begin_inset Float table
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25331 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25335 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 \begin_inset Tabular
25346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25650 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25704 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25758 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25812 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25866 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25932 \begin_layout Standard
25933 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25944 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25947 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25951 \begin_layout Section
25952 Brackets and Delimiters
25953 \begin_inset Index idx
25956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 \begin_inset Index idx
25966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25975 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25985 For some purposes, using just the keys
25990 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25991 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25992 toolbar delimiter icon
25995 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25999 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26000 \begin_inset Formula
26002 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26010 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26011 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26015 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26018 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26024 \begin_inset Formula
26026 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26034 \begin_layout Standard
26035 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26036 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26040 \begin_layout Standard
26041 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26042 left side and right side.
26043 If you use the option
26046 \begin_inset space ~
26051 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26052 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26054 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26059 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26060 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26063 \begin_layout Standard
26064 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26065 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26066 is to go inside the brackets.
26067 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26072 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26073 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26074 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26078 arg "math-delim ( )"
26084 \begin_layout Section
26085 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26086 \begin_inset Index idx
26089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 \begin_inset Index idx
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26106 \begin_inset Index idx
26109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26110 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26118 \begin_layout Standard
26119 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26123 \begin_inset space ~
26131 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26135 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26136 Here is an example:
26137 \begin_inset Formula
26139 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26148 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26149 \begin_inset space ~
26153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26155 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26160 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26161 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26162 This alignment is set in the box
26167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26216 for every column as default.
26217 For example, the sequence
26218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26229 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26230 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26231 corresponds to the relevant column.
26232 The result will look like this:
26233 \begin_inset Formula
26236 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26237 column & has & has\,right\\
26238 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26247 \begin_layout Standard
26248 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26251 arg "newline-insert newline"
26254 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26255 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26257 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26260 or the math toolbar.
26263 \begin_layout Standard
26264 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26265 It can be created with the menu
26267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26268 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26270 \begin_inset space ~
26282 Here is an example:
26283 \begin_inset Formula
26297 \begin_layout Standard
26298 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26301 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26304 arg "newline-insert newline"
26308 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26313 arg "newline-insert newline"
26316 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26324 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26325 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26326 A new row is created by every further entry of
26329 arg "newline-insert newline"
26333 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26334 Here is an example:
26335 \begin_inset Formula
26337 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26338 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26343 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26344 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26345 \begin_inset Formula
26347 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26356 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26363 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26364 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26367 reference "eq:asquared"
26372 The other types are described in section
26373 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26379 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26386 \begin_layout Section
26387 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26388 \begin_inset Index idx
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 Math ! Formula numbering
26398 \begin_inset Index idx
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 Math ! Referencing formulas
26408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26410 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26417 \begin_layout Standard
26418 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26420 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26421 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26423 \begin_inset space ~
26427 \begin_inset space ~
26435 arg "math-number-toggle"
26439 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26440 within parentheses.
26441 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26442 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26443 the document class.
26444 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26445 separated by a dot:
26446 \begin_inset Formula
26456 arg "math-number-toggle"
26459 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26460 You can only number displayed formulas.
26463 \begin_layout Standard
26464 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26466 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26467 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26469 \begin_inset space ~
26473 \begin_inset space ~
26481 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26484 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26485 \begin_inset Formula
26488 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26494 To number all lines use the shortcut
26497 arg "math-number-toggle"
26503 \begin_layout Standard
26504 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26507 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26508 A label is inserted with the menu
26510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26519 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26520 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26521 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26533 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26534 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26535 We inserted in the following example the label
26536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26543 in the second line:
26544 \begin_inset Formula
26546 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26547 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26552 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26553 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26554 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26558 \begin_inset space ~
26566 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26570 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26571 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26572 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26573 as the formula number:
26576 \begin_layout Standard
26577 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26580 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26588 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26589 's cross-reference box are described in section
26590 \begin_inset space ~
26594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26596 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26601 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26609 \begin_layout Section
26610 User defined math macros
26611 \begin_inset Index idx
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 \begin_layout Standard
26625 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26626 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26627 Math macros are explained in section
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26642 \begin_layout Section
26646 \begin_layout Subsection
26648 \begin_inset Index idx
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 \begin_layout Standard
26661 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26662 To set a font in a formula, use the
26665 \begin_inset space ~
26673 arg "math-insert \\font"
26676 , or enter its command, listed in table
26677 \begin_inset space ~
26681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26683 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 \begin_inset Float table
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26702 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26706 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26716 \begin_inset Tabular
26717 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26718 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26720 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26839 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26893 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26988 \begin_layout Standard
26989 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26997 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27013 \begin_layout Standard
27014 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27015 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27020 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27021 space when you need a space in the box.
27022 Here is an example where
27023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27034 denotes the set of numbers:
27035 \begin_inset Formula
27037 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27047 You can, for example, put a character in
27056 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27060 \begin_inset Newline newline
27063 So it is better not to use this feature.
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27068 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27072 \begin_inset Newline newline
27075 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27081 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27082 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27095 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27098 \begin_layout Standard
27099 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27102 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27112 \begin_layout Subsection
27114 \begin_inset Index idx
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 \begin_layout Standard
27127 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27129 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27133 \begin_inset space ~
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27145 \begin_inset space ~
27153 arg "math-insert \\font"
27157 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27158 in black instead of blue.
27159 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27160 Here is an example:
27161 \begin_inset Formula
27164 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27165 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27174 \begin_layout Subsection
27176 \begin_inset Index idx
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 \begin_layout Standard
27189 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27190 automatically chosen in most situations.
27208 For most characters,
27216 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27217 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27222 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27223 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27224 thinks are appropriate.
27225 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27228 arg "math-insert \\style"
27232 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27233 For example, you can set
27234 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27237 , which is normally in
27246 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27250 The four styles are used in the following example:
27253 \begin_layout Standard
27254 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27258 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27262 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27266 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27272 \begin_layout Standard
27273 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27274 is set in a particular size with the menu
27276 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27278 \begin_inset space ~
27283 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27284 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27285 will be adjusted to correspond.
27286 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27301 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27307 \begin_layout Section
27308 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27310 \begin_inset Index idx
27313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27320 \begin_inset Index idx
27323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27334 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27335 that are in common use.
27338 \begin_layout Subsection
27339 Enabling AMS-Support
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27344 the document by selecting the checkbox
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27355 \begin_inset space ~
27362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27366 \begin_inset Index idx
27369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 Document ! Settings
27378 \begin_inset space ~
27384 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27385 -errors in formulas,
27386 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27389 \begin_layout Subsection
27391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27393 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27398 \begin_inset Index idx
27401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27412 provides a selection of different formula types.
27414 allows you to choose between
27435 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27436 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27443 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27446 \begin_layout Chapter
27450 \begin_layout Section
27452 \begin_inset Index idx
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27464 name "sec:Cross-References"
27471 \begin_layout Standard
27472 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27473 's strengths is cross-references.
27474 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27476 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27477 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27478 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27481 \begin_layout Enumerate
27485 \begin_layout Enumerate
27486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27488 name "enu:Second-item"
27495 \begin_layout Enumerate
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27505 or by pressing the toolbar button
27512 A gray label box like this:
27513 \begin_inset Graphics
27514 filename clipart/label.png
27518 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27520 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27555 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27556 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27572 \begin_layout Standard
27573 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27578 or the toolbar button
27581 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27585 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27586 \begin_inset Graphics
27587 filename clipart/reference.png
27591 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27593 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27606 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27610 \begin_layout Standard
27611 As an alternative to
27613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27616 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27621 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27622 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27637 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27638 \begin_inset space ~
27642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27644 reference "enu:Second-item"
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 It is recommended to use a protected space
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27657 described in section
27658 \begin_inset space ~
27662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27664 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27673 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27674 line breaks between them.
27677 \begin_layout Standard
27678 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27681 \begin_layout Description
27682 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27685 reference "fig:Two-images"
27692 \begin_layout Description
27693 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27694 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27706 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27713 \begin_layout Description
27714 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27715 \begin_inset space ~
27719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27720 LatexCommand pageref
27721 reference "fig:Two-images"
27728 \begin_layout Description
27730 \begin_inset space ~
27734 \begin_inset space ~
27737 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27739 LatexCommand vpageref
27740 reference "fig:Two-images"
27745 \begin_inset Newline newline
27748 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27749 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27750 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27751 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27752 it prints “on the next page”.
27753 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27756 \begin_layout Description
27758 \begin_inset space ~
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27766 \begin_inset space ~
27769 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27772 reference "fig:Two-images"
27777 \begin_inset Newline newline
27780 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27786 ; otherwise it behaves like
27790 \begin_inset space ~
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27803 \begin_layout Description
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27808 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27809 \begin_inset Newline newline
27813 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27831 \begin_inset Index idx
27834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27836 packages ! prettyref
27842 \begin_inset Index idx
27845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27847 packages ! refstyle
27858 \begin_inset Newline newline
27861 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27862 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27865 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27870 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27878 is the default and preferred because
27882 supports only English documents.
27883 The format is specified by using the command
27895 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27896 preamble of the document.
27897 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27915 \begin_inset Newline newline
27922 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27927 \begin_inset Newline newline
27938 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27939 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27941 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27942 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27947 , you might do so as follows:
27948 \begin_inset Newline newline
27955 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27960 \begin_inset Newline newline
27963 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27964 the package documentation
27965 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27967 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27973 \begin_inset Newline newline
27984 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27991 \begin_layout Description
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27996 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27998 LatexCommand nameref
27999 reference "fig:Two-images"
28006 \begin_layout Description
28008 \begin_inset space ~
28011 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28012 label for the reference:
28013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28014 LatexCommand labelonly
28015 reference "fig:Two-images"
28020 \begin_inset Newline newline
28023 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28024 Code, if you want to issue a command
28025 that \SpecialChar LyX
28031 , then you may want to use the
28034 \begin_inset space ~
28039 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28049 This is the form needed for e.
28050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28054 \begin_inset space \space{}
28061 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28062 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28064 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28068 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28072 \begin_layout Standard
28073 You can only use the style
28077 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28081 is always possible.
28084 \begin_layout Standard
28085 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28086 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28088 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28089 \begin_inset space ~
28093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28095 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28103 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28107 \begin_inset space ~
28111 \begin_inset space ~
28116 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28117 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28120 \begin_inset space ~
28125 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28126 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28129 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28135 \begin_layout Standard
28136 You can change labels at any time.
28137 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28138 do not need to think about this.
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28142 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28144 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28148 \begin_layout Standard
28149 References are described in detail in the section
28150 \begin_inset space ~
28160 \begin_inset space ~
28168 \begin_layout Section
28169 Table of Contents and other Listings
28170 \begin_inset Index idx
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 \begin_inset Index idx
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 Navigating ! Outline
28190 \begin_inset Index idx
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28209 \begin_layout Subsection
28211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28213 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28220 \begin_layout Standard
28221 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28224 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28226 \begin_inset space ~
28230 \begin_inset space ~
28236 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28238 If you click on it, the
28242 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28243 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28244 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28246 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28248 \begin_inset space ~
28253 that is described in section
28254 \begin_inset space ~
28258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28260 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28267 \begin_layout Standard
28268 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28269 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28271 \begin_inset space ~
28275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28277 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28281 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28289 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28293 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28295 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28298 \begin_layout Subsection
28299 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28302 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28312 You can insert them via the
28314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28318 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28321 \begin_layout Section
28322 URLs and Hyperlinks
28323 \begin_inset Index idx
28326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28333 \begin_inset Index idx
28336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28345 \begin_layout Subsection
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28365 \begin_layout Standard
28366 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28368 \begin_inset Flex URL
28371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28373 https://www.lyx.org
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28382 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28388 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28392 \begin_layout Standard
28393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28401 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28410 \begin_layout Subsection
28412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28414 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28422 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28427 or with the toolbar button
28434 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28443 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28444 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28447 name "LyX's homepage"
28448 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28453 , an Email address like this:
28454 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28456 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28457 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28463 , or a link to a file.
28468 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28476 \begin_layout Standard
28477 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28490 to the link target.
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28495 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28496 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28497 the text style dialog.
28498 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28504 name "LyX's homepage"
28505 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28513 \begin_layout Standard
28514 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28518 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28521 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28525 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28527 \begin_inset Newline newline
28535 \begin_inset Newline newline
28542 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28545 \begin_layout Section
28547 \begin_inset Index idx
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28559 name "sec:Appendices"
28566 \begin_layout Standard
28567 Appendices are created with the menu
28569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28571 \begin_inset space ~
28575 \begin_inset space ~
28581 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28582 as the appendix part of the book.
28583 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28587 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28588 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28589 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28590 and the subsection number.
28591 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28597 \begin_inset space ~
28601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28603 reference "chap:Credits"
28608 \begin_inset space ~
28612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28614 reference "subsec:Export"
28621 \begin_layout Section
28623 \begin_inset Index idx
28626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28635 name "sec:Bibliography"
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28643 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28645 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28646 \begin_inset space ~
28650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28652 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28659 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28664 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28665 \begin_inset space ~
28669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28671 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28676 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28677 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28678 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28682 using a bibliography database.
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28687 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28691 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28692 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28693 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28694 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28695 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28698 \begin_layout Subsection
28699 The Bibliography Environment
28700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28702 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28714 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28716 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28725 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28727 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28728 of ASCII characters only.
28732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28737 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28743 \begin_inset Newline newline
28747 \begin_inset Flex URL
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28764 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28774 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28775 \begin_inset Newline newline
28782 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28783 the number of the entry.
28788 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28797 \begin_layout Standard
28798 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28803 or the toolbar button
28806 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28810 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28811 containing the available citations.
28812 Select one or more keys from the list and
28822 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28823 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28827 \begin_layout Standard
28828 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28829 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28830 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28846 Companion Second Edition
28849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28851 key "latexcompanion"
28859 \begin_layout Standard
28860 The \SpecialChar LyX
28861 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28862 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28872 \begin_layout Standard
28873 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28880 \begin_inset Index idx
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28891 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28903 Author A and Author B(Year)
28904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28911 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28913 Then, if you select
28916 \begin_inset space ~
28921 in the document settings
28922 \begin_inset Index idx
28925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28926 Document ! Settings
28933 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28935 \begin_inset space ~
28941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28943 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28950 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28959 \begin_inset space ~
28967 arg "layout-paragraph"
28971 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28974 \begin_layout Subsection
28975 Bibliography databases
28976 \begin_inset Index idx
28979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28980 Bibliography ! Databases
28986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28988 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29002 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29004 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29005 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29010 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29012 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29013 your working field in a database.
29014 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29015 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29016 list for that document.
29017 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29022 The database is a text file with the file extension
29023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29035 The format is explained in
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29043 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29047 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29053 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29054 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29055 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29057 \begin_inset Flex URL
29060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29062 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29070 \begin_layout Standard
29072 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29073 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29074 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29076 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29078 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29079 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29080 Those are addressed by
29085 \begin_inset Index idx
29088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29090 packages ! biblatex
29096 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29097 (although it has been significantly
29098 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29108 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29109 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29110 might conversely fail to correctly
29111 handle databases that use specific
29120 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29125 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29130 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 \begin_inset Index idx
29139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29140 Document ! Settings
29152 \begin_inset space ~
29157 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29166 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29168 \begin_inset Index idx
29171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29181 \begin_layout Standard
29182 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29190 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29192 \begin_inset space ~
29198 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29199 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29207 Add bibliography to TOC
29209 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29214 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29215 in the document or just the cited references.
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29220 style file is a text file with the file extension
29221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29232 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29233 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29234 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29235 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29237 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29243 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29244 \begin_inset Newline newline
29248 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29250 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29260 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29265 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29269 \begin_layout Standard
29270 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29275 \begin_inset Index idx
29278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29285 \begin_inset Index idx
29288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29290 packages ! biblatex
29298 \begin_layout Standard
29299 Accessing a database via
29303 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29311 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29313 \begin_inset space ~
29319 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29320 you cannot select a
29325 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29329 \begin_layout Standard
29334 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29347 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29348 file (text file with the file extension
29349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29361 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29363 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29367 \begin_layout Standard
29372 styles are not set in the
29375 \begin_inset space ~
29380 dialog, but in the document settings.
29381 \begin_inset Index idx
29384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29385 Document ! Settings
29390 However, in the dialog in the
29394 field, which is only visible if you use
29398 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29399 example how its heading will appear).
29400 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29405 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29415 \begin_layout Standard
29416 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29417 \begin_inset space ~
29421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29423 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29434 Bibliography Processors
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29439 uses a bibliography processor,
29440 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29441 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29442 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29444 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29445 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29451 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29452 You can do this on a general level in
29454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29455 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29456 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29459 or for individual documents in
29461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29462 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29466 The following variants are available by default:
29469 \begin_layout Description
29470 biber a specific, modern processor
29471 \begin_inset Index idx
29474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29481 developed exclusively for
29485 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29491 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29496 makes use of; if you use the
29500 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29507 \begin_layout Description
29508 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29509 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29510 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29514 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29517 \begin_layout Description
29518 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29519 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29523 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29527 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29531 features are supported.
29534 \begin_layout Standard
29535 By default (with the
29541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29556 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29557 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29560 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29561 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29574 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29575 -based bibliography styles).
29576 This should suit most needs.
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29581 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29582 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29587 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29588 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29589 You can adjust it in
29591 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29592 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29593 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29601 can add below the selection.
29602 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29603 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29609 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29625 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29627 These are explained in detail in section
29629 Customizing Bibliographies
29633 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29638 Additional Features
29643 \begin_layout Subsection
29645 \begin_inset Index idx
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29649 Bibliography ! Citation format
29655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29657 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29665 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29670 \begin_inset space \space{}
29673 numerical citation (as
29674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29681 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 ) or author-year citations (as
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29699 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29704 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29708 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29712 \begin_inset Index idx
29715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29716 Document ! Settings
29721 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29727 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29728 labels, is there to use
29731 \begin_inset space ~
29742 \begin_inset space ~
29747 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29750 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29757 \begin_layout Standard
29758 With a bibliography database (see
29759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29761 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29768 ) one has in contrary to the
29772 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29773 These style formats are available:
29776 \begin_layout Description
29778 \begin_inset space ~
29781 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29782 -based approached without any additional packages
29783 (simple numeric citations).
29786 \begin_layout Description
29787 Biblatex loads the package
29792 \begin_inset Index idx
29795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 packages ! biblatex
29802 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29804 Biblatex citation style
29808 Biblatex bibliography style
29811 Options to the package
29815 can be entered in the
29822 \begin_layout Description
29824 \begin_inset space ~
29828 \begin_inset space ~
29831 mode) loads the package
29835 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29836 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29848 behavior very closely.
29853 this option has some additional styles.
29858 styles are also supported by this variant.
29861 \begin_layout Description
29863 \begin_inset space ~
29866 (BibTeX) loads the package
29871 \begin_inset Index idx
29874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29881 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29884 \begin_layout Description
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29889 (BibTeX) loads the package
29894 \begin_inset Index idx
29897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29916 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29918 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29927 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29929 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29930 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29932 Biblatex citation style
29935 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29941 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29946 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29947 are available in the
29952 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29953 a name prefix such as
29954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29969 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29974 \begin_inset space \space{}
29978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29996 \begin_inset space \space{}
29999 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30005 \begin_inset space \space{}
30009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30021 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30025 \begin_inset space ~
30033 \begin_inset space ~
30039 Here is a simple example where the text
30040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30051 appears after the reference:
30054 \begin_layout Quote
30056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30059 key "latexcompanion"
30067 \begin_layout Standard
30068 All styles except for
30072 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30082 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30087 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30088 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30089 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30094 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30095 multi-citation (so-called
30096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30099 qualified citation lists
30100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30106 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30111 dialog will display three columns in the field
30118 \begin_inset space ~
30126 \begin_inset space ~
30134 \begin_inset space ~
30140 If you double-click on an item's
30143 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_inset space ~
30156 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30159 General text before
30165 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30168 \begin_layout Section
30170 \begin_inset Index idx
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30190 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30199 or the toolbar button
30206 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30207 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30208 by \SpecialChar LyX
30209 as the index entry.
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30213 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30216 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30224 A light blue box labeled
30225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30236 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30237 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30243 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30244 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30245 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30249 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30257 \begin_layout Subsection
30258 Grouping Index Entries
30259 \begin_inset Index idx
30262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30272 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30274 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30275 lists under the entry
30276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30284 First we create the entry
30285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30293 \begin_inset space ~
30297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30299 reference "subsec:Lists"
30304 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30305 \begin_inset space ~
30309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30311 reference "sec:Itemize"
30315 , we insert the command
30318 \begin_layout Standard
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30335 for the enumerated list in section
30336 \begin_inset space ~
30340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30342 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30349 \begin_layout Standard
30350 The exclamation mark
30351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30358 marks the grouping levels.
30359 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30360 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30361 If we don't have an index entry for
30362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30369 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30372 \begin_layout Subsection
30374 \begin_inset Index idx
30377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 Index ! Page ranges
30386 \begin_layout Standard
30387 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30389 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30390 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30391 an index entry in section
30392 \begin_inset space ~
30396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30398 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30405 \begin_layout Standard
30408 Paragraph environments|(
30411 \begin_layout Standard
30412 and another entry at the end of section
30413 \begin_inset space ~
30417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30419 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30426 \begin_layout Standard
30429 Paragraph environments|)
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30457 respectively start and end the index range.
30458 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30459 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30460 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30461 An example is the index entry
30462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30465 Document ! Settings
30466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30472 \begin_layout Subsection
30474 \begin_inset Index idx
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 Index ! Cross referencing
30486 \begin_layout Standard
30487 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30488 We referred for example in the index entry
30489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30497 \begin_inset space ~
30501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30503 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30507 ) to the index entry
30508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30515 in the same section using the entry
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30521 GIF|see{Image formats}
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30527 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30528 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30531 \begin_layout Subsection
30533 \begin_inset Index idx
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30537 Index ! Entry order
30545 \begin_layout Standard
30546 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30547 follow the rules for the index order.
30548 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30556 \begin_inset space ~
30560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30562 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30571 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30572 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30597 \begin_inset Index idx
30600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 Dummy entries ! maïs
30607 \begin_inset Index idx
30610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30611 Dummy entries ! maître
30617 \begin_inset Index idx
30620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30621 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30626 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30627 maïs, maison, maître.
30628 To achieve this, we use the command
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30634 previous entry@current entry
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 In our case we want to have
30639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30654 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30663 \begin_layout Standard
30664 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30665 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30667 See the next subsection for an example.
30670 \begin_layout Subsection
30672 \begin_inset Index idx
30675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30676 Index ! Entry layout
30684 \begin_layout Standard
30685 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30686 \begin_inset Index idx
30689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 This is an italic dummy entry
30697 You can also format the page number using the character
30698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30705 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30706 -command without a backslash.
30707 We can write for example
30710 \begin_layout Standard
30713 italic page number:|textit
30716 \begin_layout Standard
30717 to get the page number in italic.
30718 \begin_inset Index idx
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30727 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30728 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30752 Have a look at section
30753 \begin_inset space ~
30757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30759 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30763 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30768 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30776 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30780 to generate the index, see section
30781 \begin_inset space ~
30785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30787 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30796 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30801 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30805 key "latexcompanion"
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30821 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30822 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30823 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30824 If so, put the following in the preamble
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30839 \begin_layout Standard
30843 \begin_layout Standard
30849 \begin_layout Standard
30850 in the index entry.
30851 \begin_inset Index idx
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30860 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30861 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30862 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30865 \begin_layout Standard
30866 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30867 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30868 a bold font for all index entries.
30869 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30881 documentation for details,
30882 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30884 key "makeindex,xindy"
30892 \begin_layout Subsection
30894 \begin_inset Index idx
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30906 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30913 \begin_layout Standard
30914 If the index generation program
30918 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30919 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30923 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30924 distribution, is used.
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30933 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30934 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30935 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30936 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30937 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30947 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30949 dialog, see section
30950 \begin_inset space ~
30954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30956 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30961 The available options are listed and explained in
30962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30964 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30970 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30976 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30979 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30980 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30984 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30985 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30988 \begin_layout Subsection
30992 \begin_layout Standard
30993 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30994 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31002 next to the standard index.
31004 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31005 that add this feature.
31012 \begin_inset Index idx
31015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 packages ! splitidx
31022 package to generate multiple indexes.
31023 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31039 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31040 style, but it also includes
31041 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31042 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31050 \begin_layout Standard
31051 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31052 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31055 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31058 and select the option
31060 Use multiple Indexes
31067 already contains the standard index
31068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31076 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31077 also appear as a heading) to the
31081 input field and press the
31086 The new index now also appears in the list.
31087 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31088 label color to the new index.
31091 \begin_layout Standard
31092 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31102 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31103 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31104 are additional features:
31107 \begin_layout Itemize
31108 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31109 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31112 \begin_layout Itemize
31113 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31114 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31119 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31120 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31121 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31122 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31125 \begin_layout Itemize
31130 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
31131 code in the name of the index.
31134 \begin_layout Section
31135 Nomenclature/Glossary
31136 \begin_inset Index idx
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 \begin_inset Index idx
31149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31180 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31187 \begin_layout Standard
31188 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31189 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31190 called nomenclature or glossary.
31193 \begin_layout Standard
31194 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31201 \begin_inset Index idx
31204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31214 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31221 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31226 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31227 and then use the menu
31229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31235 \begin_inset space ~
31240 or the toolbar button
31243 arg "nomencl-insert"
31248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31259 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31262 \begin_layout Standard
31263 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31264 The first is the term or
31268 that you wish to define.
31273 of the term or symbol.
31276 \begin_layout Standard
31277 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31285 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31286 code for nomenclature entries the option
31290 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31298 \begin_layout Subsection
31299 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31300 \begin_inset Index idx
31303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 Nomenclature ! Layout
31312 \begin_layout Standard
31313 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31317 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31324 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31332 \begin_inset Newline newline
31340 \begin_inset Newline newline
31346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31353 character starts/ends the formula.
31354 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31355 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31367 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31377 \begin_layout Standard
31378 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31379 syntax is given in section
31380 \begin_inset space ~
31384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31386 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31393 \begin_layout Standard
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31402 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31404 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31409 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31416 in this document is:
31417 \begin_inset Newline newline
31422 dummy entry for the character
31427 \begin_inset Newline newline
31439 \begin_inset space ~
31449 font use the command
31478 \begin_layout Standard
31479 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31484 \begin_inset space \space{}
31488 \begin_inset Newline newline
31504 \begin_inset Newline newline
31507 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31508 This command will make the font of all symbols
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31524 If the characters |
31525 \begin_inset space \space{}
31529 \begin_inset space \space{}
31533 \begin_inset space \space{}
31537 \begin_inset space \space{}
31541 \begin_inset space \space{}
31544 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31545 code they need to be escaped
31546 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31547 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31548 LatexCommand nomenclature
31549 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31550 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31558 \begin_layout Subsection
31559 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31560 \begin_inset Index idx
31563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31564 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31572 \begin_layout Standard
31573 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31574 -code of the symbol
31576 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31578 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31581 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31582 LatexCommand nomenclature
31584 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31592 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31596 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31597 LatexCommand nomenclature
31600 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31606 They will be sorted by
31607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31633 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31636 will be sorted before the
31640 since the character
31641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31648 is considered in sorting.
31651 \begin_layout Standard
31652 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31655 \begin_inset space ~
31660 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31661 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31663 For the example given, you can insert
31667 in this field for the
31668 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31675 will be located before
31676 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31682 \begin_layout Standard
31683 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31698 \begin_layout Subsection
31699 Nomenclature Options
31700 \begin_inset Index idx
31703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31704 Nomenclature ! Options
31710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31712 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31719 \begin_layout Standard
31724 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31725 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31728 \begin_layout Description
31729 refeq Appends the phrase
31730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31745 to every nomenclature entry, where
31751 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31754 \begin_layout Description
31755 refpage Appends the phrase
31756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31771 to every nomenclature entry, where
31777 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31780 \begin_layout Description
31781 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31784 \begin_layout Standard
31785 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31786 class options list in the
31788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31792 In this document the options
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31808 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31813 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31816 \begin_layout Description
31826 \begin_layout Description
31829 nomrefpage Like the
31836 \begin_layout Description
31839 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31848 \begin_layout Description
31852 \begin_inset space ~
31858 \begin_inset space ~
31863 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31875 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31876 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31889 \begin_inset Newline newline
31895 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31899 \begin_inset space ~
31911 unskip, see equation
31914 \begin_inset Newline newline
31921 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31922 \begin_inset Newline newline
31928 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31932 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_layout Standard
31950 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31953 \begin_inset space ~
31958 in the document settings under
31961 \begin_inset space ~
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31977 \begin_inset Newline newline
31981 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31985 \begin_inset space ~
31997 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31999 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32000 \begin_inset Newline newline
32007 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32008 \begin_inset Newline newline
32012 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32016 \begin_inset space ~
32028 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32033 \begin_layout Subsection
32034 Printing the Nomenclature
32035 \begin_inset Index idx
32038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32039 Nomenclature ! Printing
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32048 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32051 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32067 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32068 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32069 You can choose between these settings:
32072 \begin_layout Description
32073 Default a space of 1
32074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32080 \begin_layout Description
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32086 \begin_inset space ~
32089 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32092 \begin_layout Description
32093 Custom custom space
32096 \begin_layout Standard
32097 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32106 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32114 For example, in order to change the name to
32118 , add the following line to the preamble:
32121 \begin_layout Standard
32129 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32132 \begin_layout Subsection
32133 Nomenclature Program
32134 \begin_inset Index idx
32137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32138 Nomenclature ! Program
32144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32146 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32153 \begin_layout Standard
32159 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32160 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32162 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32167 by adding options, see section
32168 \begin_inset space ~
32172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32174 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32179 The available options are listed and explained in
32180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32182 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32190 \begin_layout Section
32192 \begin_inset Index idx
32195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32202 \begin_inset Index idx
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32206 Document ! Branches
32212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32214 name "sec:Branches"
32221 \begin_layout Standard
32222 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32223 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32224 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32225 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32228 \begin_layout Standard
32229 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32230 allows you to put text into branches.
32231 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32232 To create a branch, either select the menu
32234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32235 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32238 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32240 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32247 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32248 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32249 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32250 and whether the name of the branch should
32251 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32252 (see below for an example).
32253 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32254 to the name of the other) and to add
32255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32267 \begin_inset space ~
32270 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32271 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32276 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32281 where you can choose a branch.
32282 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32288 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 \begin_inset Branch Question
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32301 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32319 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32338 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32339 Consider for example a file
32340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32347 which has the above branches.
32349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32356 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32380 branch were inactive,
32381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32396 branch was active, likewise
32397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32412 branch was active, and
32413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32416 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32420 if both branches were active.
32421 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32422 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32429 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32435 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32436 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32449 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32466 branch is deactivated.
32472 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32479 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32480 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32481 definitions for each branch.
32482 For example you can define for the question branch
32486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32487 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32488 -syntax, see section
32489 \begin_inset space ~
32493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32495 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32507 \begin_layout Standard
32517 \begin_layout Standard
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32528 and for the answer branch
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32541 \begin_layout Standard
32551 \begin_layout Standard
32552 \begin_inset Branch Question
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32589 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32593 \begin_layout Standard
32597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32625 \begin_layout Standard
32626 Now it is possible to use the
32630 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32637 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32640 commands to obtain conditional output.
32641 Here is an example formula where only the
32648 \begin_inset Formula
32650 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32667 \begin_layout Standard
32668 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32674 \begin_inset space \space{}
32677 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32679 For this advanced usage, see the
32685 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32690 \begin_layout Section
32692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32694 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32699 \begin_inset Index idx
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32711 \begin_layout Standard
32714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32715 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32718 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32720 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 \begin_inset Index idx
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32731 packages ! hyperref
32736 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32737 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32738 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32739 part of the document.
32743 \begin_layout Standard
32744 The header information in the dialog tab
32748 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32749 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32750 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32751 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32755 \begin_inset space ~
32759 \begin_inset space ~
32764 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32765 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32766 and author entries.
32770 \begin_inset space ~
32774 \begin_inset space ~
32778 \begin_inset space ~
32783 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32787 You can specify in the dialog tab
32791 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32796 \begin_inset space ~
32800 \begin_inset space ~
32804 \begin_inset space ~
32809 option allows long links to be split;
32812 \begin_inset space ~
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32833 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32836 \begin_inset space ~
32841 colors the different links.
32842 The default colors are:
32845 \begin_layout Labeling
32846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32851 for hyperlinks and URLs
32854 \begin_layout Labeling
32855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32863 \begin_layout Labeling
32864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32872 \begin_layout Standard
32873 but you can change these in the field
32878 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32884 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32892 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32893 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32894 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32902 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32903 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32904 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32914 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32915 when opening the PDF.
32917 \begin_inset space ~
32920 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32921 \begin_inset space ~
32924 1 will only display the sections.
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32928 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32929 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32935 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32936 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32946 \begin_layout Section
32948 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32952 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32959 \begin_layout Subsection
32962 \begin_inset Index idx
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32975 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32983 As \SpecialChar LyX
32984 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32985 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32986 commands and constructs,
32989 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32990 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32991 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32992 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32993 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32994 cannot support all packages and
32998 \begin_layout Standard
32999 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33000 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33001 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33005 Code box is created by the menu
33007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33009 \begin_inset space ~
33014 or by the toolbar button
33027 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33035 \begin_layout Standard
33036 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33038 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33040 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33045 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33050 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33057 , you can write the command part
33063 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33064 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33068 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33069 Code box behind the word.
33070 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33071 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33075 \begin_layout Standard
33076 \begin_inset Graphics
33077 filename clipart/ERT.png
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33090 This is a line with a
33094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33126 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33127 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33128 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33129 know that the command is finished.
33137 \begin_layout Subsection
33138 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33140 \begin_inset Argument 1
33143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33144 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33151 \begin_inset Index idx
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33164 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33172 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33173 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33174 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33175 uses in the background.
33176 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33177 is based on commands, you can
33178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33186 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33187 any time if you know the right commands.
33188 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33189 is the end of the day.
33190 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33191 all caption labels bold.
33192 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33194 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33199 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33201 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33203 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33206 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33216 \begin_layout Standard
33217 As result you find that the package
33222 \begin_inset Index idx
33225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33233 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33238 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33242 \begin_inset space ~
33250 \begin_layout Standard
33255 usepackage[options]{package name}
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33259 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33260 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33261 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33262 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33265 \begin_layout Standard
33266 In your case the package name is
33271 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33276 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33277 So you add the command
33280 \begin_layout Standard
33285 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 For more commands provided by the
33298 package, have a look at its documentation,
33299 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33314 \begin_layout Standard
33315 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33317 For example if you use a
33321 class, you don't need the package
33325 , you can instead write
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33333 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33338 \begin_layout Standard
33339 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33340 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33341 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33348 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33351 \begin_layout Standard
33352 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33353 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33355 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33356 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33357 Code box as described in the previous
33361 \begin_layout Standard
33362 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33363 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33368 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33376 \begin_layout Standard
33377 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33383 \begin_layout Standard
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 \begin_inset Note Note
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33401 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33409 \begin_layout Left Header
33410 \begin_inset Argument 1
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 \begin_inset Note Note
33436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33437 defines the header line as described below
33445 \begin_layout Center Header
33446 \begin_inset Argument 1
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33458 \begin_layout Right Header
33459 \begin_inset Argument 1
33462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 \begin_layout Left Footer
33484 \begin_inset Argument 1
33487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33508 \begin_layout Center Footer
33509 \begin_inset Argument 1
33512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 \begin_inset Newline newline
33528 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33534 \begin_layout Right Footer
33535 \begin_inset Argument 1
33538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33560 \begin_layout Section
33561 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33564 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33569 \begin_inset Index idx
33572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 Document ! Header/Footer line
33579 \begin_inset Index idx
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33591 \begin_layout Standard
33592 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33619 As a second step add in the menu
33621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33622 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33631 Custom Header/Footerlines
33634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33638 This module offers the following 6
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33645 \begin_layout Description
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33655 \begin_inset space ~
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33663 \begin_inset space ~
33669 \begin_layout Description
33671 \begin_inset space ~
33675 \begin_inset space ~
33679 \begin_inset space ~
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33687 \begin_inset space ~
33693 \begin_layout Standard
33694 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33695 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33700 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33702 \begin_inset space ~
33706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33708 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33712 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33715 \begin_layout Standard
33716 \begin_inset Float figure
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33725 \begin_inset Tabular
33726 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33727 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33728 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33729 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33730 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33779 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33794 The normal text on the page goes here.
33795 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33797 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33798 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33803 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33812 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33841 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33893 name "fig:Page-layout"
33897 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33910 \begin_layout Standard
33911 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33919 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33928 is set to “Default”.
33929 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33938 \begin_layout Subsection
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33943 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33944 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33945 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33946 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33948 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33950 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33954 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33955 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33969 \begin_layout Description
33972 thepage prints the current page number
33975 \begin_layout Description
33978 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33981 \begin_layout Description
33984 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33987 \begin_layout Description
33990 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33991 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33998 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34001 because it usually goes in a left header.
34004 \begin_layout Description
34007 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34008 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34010 It is normally used in the right header.
34013 \begin_layout Subsection
34014 Default header/footer
34017 \begin_layout Standard
34018 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34019 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34020 footer has the page number.
34021 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34022 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34023 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34026 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_layout Subsection
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34040 Some pages are different.
34041 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34042 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34043 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34044 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34045 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34049 Header and footer decoration line
34052 \begin_layout Standard
34053 By default, you get a 0.4
34054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34057 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34058 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34070 in the following way:
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34080 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34097 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34104 \begin_layout Standard
34105 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34107 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34123 Several header/footer lines
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34128 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34129 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34131 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34147 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34149 \begin_inset space ~
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34164 headheight}{height}
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34172 is a size in standard units (e.
34173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34177 \begin_inset space \space{}
34185 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34186 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34187 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34188 logfile with the menu
34190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34200 \begin_inset space ~
34205 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34210 \begin_inset Index idx
34213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34215 packages ! fancyhdr
34221 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34222 for your header/footer.
34225 \begin_layout Subsection
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34230 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34231 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34232 This example consists of the following definition:
34235 \begin_layout Description
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34246 , empty optional argument
34249 \begin_layout Description
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34254 Header empty, empty optional argument
34257 \begin_layout Description
34259 \begin_inset space ~
34268 in the optional argument
34271 \begin_layout Description
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34282 in the optional argument
34285 \begin_layout Description
34287 \begin_inset space ~
34300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34304 \begin_inset Newline newline
34308 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34315 in the optional argument
34318 \begin_layout Description
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34329 , empty optional argument
34332 \begin_layout Description
34335 headrulewidth set to 2
34336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34344 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34375 pagestyle{headings}
34381 \begin_inset Note Note
34384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34385 switches back to page style with the default headings
34393 \begin_layout Section
34394 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34397 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34402 \begin_inset Index idx
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 \begin_inset Index idx
34415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34424 \begin_layout Standard
34426 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34427 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34428 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34431 \begin_layout Subsection
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34442 \begin_inset Index idx
34445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 packages ! preview-latex
34452 (on some systems named simply
34457 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34466 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34468 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34476 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34477 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34478 -package are automatically
34479 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34483 \begin_layout Subsection
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34489 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34491 activate the option
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34501 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34514 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34521 \begin_inset space ~
34534 \begin_inset space ~
34539 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34556 \begin_inset space ~
34564 \begin_layout Standard
34565 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34566 and when you finish
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34579 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34580 generated by activating the option
34583 \begin_inset space ~
34589 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34597 \begin_layout Subsection
34598 Selected document parts
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34602 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34603 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34604 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34605 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34607 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34613 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34614 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34615 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34626 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34638 is explained in section
34640 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34645 \begin_inset space ~
34655 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34656 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34657 the final rotated boxes,
34658 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34659 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34661 Here is the result:
34664 \begin_layout Standard
34665 \begin_inset Preview
34667 \begin_layout Standard
34672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34676 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34682 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34692 height_special "totalheight"
34697 backgroundcolor "none"
34700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34725 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34731 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34754 Previewing works also for colors.
34755 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34774 is explained in section
34781 \begin_inset space ~
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 \begin_inset Preview
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34825 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34852 If \SpecialChar LyX
34853 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34854 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34855 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34856 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34857 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34858 the \SpecialChar TeX
34860 If \SpecialChar LyX
34861 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34862 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34864 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34865 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34866 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34869 \begin_layout Subsection
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34876 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34879 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34881 \begin_inset space ~
34886 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34888 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34890 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34891 's main window, then only this selection
34892 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34893 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34894 the source view window.
34899 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34900 ; but note that if you have
34901 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34903 not just the one which is open at the time.
34906 \begin_layout Section
34907 Advanced Find and Replace
34908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34910 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34915 \begin_inset Index idx
34918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 \begin_inset Index idx
34928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34937 \begin_layout Subsection
34941 \begin_layout Standard
34942 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34943 allows for searching of complex,
34944 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34946 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34947 The key-features are:
34950 \begin_layout Itemize
34951 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34952 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34953 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34957 \begin_layout Itemize
34958 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34959 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34960 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34961 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34964 \begin_layout Itemize
34965 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34966 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34967 outside of mathematics environments
34970 \begin_layout Itemize
34971 Search may be widened to a specific
34976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34980 \begin_inset space ~
34983 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34984 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34991 \begin_layout Itemize
34992 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34993 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34998 \begin_inset space ~
35001 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35004 \begin_layout Subsection
35008 \begin_layout Standard
35009 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35024 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35027 ) or the toolbar button
35030 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35036 Advanced Find and Replace
35041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35045 \begin_layout Standard
35051 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35060 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35063 arg "paragraph-break"
35067 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35068 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35072 arg "paragraph-break"
35075 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35079 searches backwards.
35082 \begin_layout Standard
35086 \begin_inset space ~
35091 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35105 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35109 Searching for mathematics
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 Mathematical formulas, such as
35114 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35117 or something more complex like
35118 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35121 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35126 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35127 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35128 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35129 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35139 \begin_layout Standard
35140 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35141 This is done by switching to the
35145 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35150 This way, entering in the
35157 \begin_layout Itemize
35158 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35159 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35162 \begin_layout Itemize
35163 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35164 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35167 \begin_layout Itemize
35168 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35169 of it only within section headings.
35170 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35171 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35175 \begin_layout Itemize
35176 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35177 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 The entries made in the
35189 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35198 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35202 button or alternatively press
35205 arg "paragraph-break"
35212 while the cursor is in the
35215 \begin_inset space ~
35223 \begin_layout Standard
35224 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35226 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35230 \begin_layout Itemize
35231 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35232 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35240 with its typewriter version
35241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35255 \begin_layout Itemize
35256 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35262 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35274 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35281 (you may want to enable the
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35292 \begin_inset space ~
35297 options and disable the
35305 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35313 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35314 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35318 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35321 , or occurrences of
35322 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35326 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35332 \begin_layout Subsection
35336 \begin_layout Standard
35337 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35342 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35346 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35356 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35362 This is done with the context menu
35364 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35365 Insert Regular Expression
35367 while the cursor is in the
35372 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35373 expression matching rules
35377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35378 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35388 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35389 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35395 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35396 same text in the document.
35397 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35398 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35401 \begin_layout Enumerate
35402 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35407 editor the fraction
35408 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35412 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35415 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35416 fractions with the given denominator.
35419 \begin_layout Enumerate
35420 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35432 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35437 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35438 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35439 Also, by inserting a
35440 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35443 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35444 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35449 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35450 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35453 , and referring back to them through
35454 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35458 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35462 For example, try searching with the regexp
35463 \begin_inset Newline newline
35466 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35469 \begin_inset Newline newline
35472 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35475 \begin_layout Standard
35476 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35488 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35489 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35490 sub-expressions is absolute.
35492 \begin_inset space ~
35496 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35499 always refers to the first occurrence of
35500 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35503 in all entered regexps.
35511 \begin_layout Section
35513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35515 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35520 \begin_inset Index idx
35523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35534 has a built-in spell checker.
35537 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35544 key or the toolbar button
35547 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35550 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35551 beginning of the currently selected text.
35552 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35553 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35554 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35555 scrolled so that it is visible.
35556 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35557 n, if any could be found.
35558 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35562 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35563 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35567 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35574 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35575 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35577 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35578 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35589 arg "dialog-show character"
35592 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35594 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35597 \begin_layout Standard
35598 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35599 can be downloaded from here:
35600 \begin_inset Newline newline
35604 \begin_inset Flex URL
35607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35609 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35615 \begin_inset Newline newline
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35622 files for each language.
35623 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35627 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35628 's installation subfolder
35636 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35638 \begin_inset Newline newline
35641 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35642 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35643 but in most cases these are
35659 is the language code.
35662 \begin_layout Subsection
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35670 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35672 \begin_inset space ~
35675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35678 you can set the following things:
35681 \begin_layout Description
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35686 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35687 should use for spell checking.
35688 Depending on your platform,
35698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35699 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35700 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35715 \begin_inset space ~
35718 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35721 \begin_layout Description
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35726 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35727 will always use the given language
35728 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35731 \begin_layout Description
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35736 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35742 \begin_inset space \space{}
35746 This should normally not be needed.
35749 \begin_layout Description
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35758 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35770 \begin_layout Description
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35775 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35776 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35777 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35778 appear in a context menu.
35779 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35783 \begin_layout Description
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset space ~
35796 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35800 \begin_layout Section
35802 \begin_inset Index idx
35805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35814 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35823 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35824 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35836 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35846 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35848 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35849 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35850 which are available for many languages.
35853 \begin_layout Standard
35854 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35855 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35859 \begin_layout Subsection
35860 Setting up the thesaurus
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35872 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35876 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35881 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35895 For instance, the US English files are named:
35898 \begin_layout Itemize
35902 \begin_layout Itemize
35906 \begin_layout Standard
35915 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35916 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35919 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35920 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35921 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35928 ) to the path where they are installed.
35932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35933 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35934 ies, typical locations are
35940 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35944 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35948 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35951 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35957 LibreOffice-<Version>
35964 On the Mac, the default location is
35966 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35967 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35968 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35969 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35970 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35971 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35979 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35980 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35981 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35987 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35989 \begin_inset Newline newline
35993 \begin_inset Flex URL
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35998 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36006 \begin_layout Standard
36007 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36008 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36010 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36011 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36012 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36019 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36021 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36022 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36029 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36032 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36038 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36041 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36042 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36050 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36051 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36052 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36054 \begin_inset space ~
36059 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36062 \begin_layout Subsection
36063 Using the thesaurus
36066 \begin_layout Standard
36067 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36069 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36072 or the toolbar button
36075 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36078 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36080 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36082 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36083 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36084 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36093 ), related terms (such as
36096 \begin_inset space ~
36105 ), compounds (such as
36108 \begin_inset space ~
36117 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36126 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36129 \begin_layout Standard
36130 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36131 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36135 \begin_layout Standard
36136 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36137 the dictionary, such as the above
36141 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36146 \begin_inset space \space{}
36149 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36150 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36151 For example, looking up the word form
36155 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36160 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36165 \begin_inset space \space{}
36176 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36177 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36178 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36181 \begin_layout Section
36183 \begin_inset Index idx
36186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36193 \begin_inset Index idx
36196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36197 Document ! Change Tracking
36203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36205 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36212 \begin_layout Standard
36213 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36214 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36215 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36216 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36223 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36225 \begin_inset space ~
36233 \begin_layout Standard
36234 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36248 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36249 You can change the color in
36251 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36252 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36263 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36269 \begin_inset Index idx
36272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36273 Color ! Change tracking
36278 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36279 's status bar when the
36280 cursor is in changed text.
36281 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36284 arg "changes-merge"
36290 \begin_layout Standard
36291 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36293 \begin_inset Index idx
36296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36305 \begin_layout Standard
36306 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36312 \begin_layout Standard
36313 \begin_inset Graphics
36314 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36322 \begin_layout Standard
36323 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36329 \begin_layout Standard
36330 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36333 \begin_layout Standard
36334 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36340 \begin_layout Standard
36341 \begin_inset Tabular
36342 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36343 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36344 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36345 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36355 arg "changes-track"
36363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36374 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36376 \begin_inset space ~
36385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36394 arg "changes-output"
36402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36413 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36415 \begin_inset space ~
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36453 Jumps to the next change
36459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36468 arg "change-accept"
36476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36487 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36489 \begin_inset space ~
36498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36507 arg "change-reject"
36515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36526 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36546 arg "changes-merge"
36554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36562 \begin_inset space ~
36565 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36585 arg "all-changes-accept"
36593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36601 \begin_inset space ~
36604 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36628 arg "all-changes-reject"
36636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36642 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36647 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36649 \begin_inset space ~
36653 \begin_inset space ~
36662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36686 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36688 \begin_inset space ~
36697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36720 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36745 \begin_layout Standard
36746 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36768 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36769 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36770 the next change after the current cursor position.
36771 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36772 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36773 step to the next change.
36774 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36779 to describe a change.
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36783 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36789 \begin_inset Index idx
36792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36800 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36802 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36809 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36813 \begin_layout Section
36814 Comparison of Documents
36815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36817 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36822 \begin_inset Index idx
36825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36826 Comparison of documents
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36838 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36842 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36843 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36845 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36847 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36851 \begin_inset space ~
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36876 \begin_inset space ~
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36893 enables the change tracking option
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36909 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36912 \begin_layout Section
36913 International Support
36914 \begin_inset Index idx
36917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36918 International support
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36928 with any language you want.
36929 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36930 up \SpecialChar LyX
36932 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36934 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36944 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36945 \begin_inset space ~
36949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36951 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36958 \begin_layout Subsection
36960 \begin_inset Index idx
36963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36970 \begin_inset Index idx
36973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 Document ! Settings
36980 \begin_inset Index idx
36983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36984 Document ! Language
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36996 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36999 dialog lets you set
37001 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37006 \begin_layout Standard
37011 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37021 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37022 For details about the different encoding options see section
37023 \begin_inset space ~
37027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37029 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37036 \begin_layout Subsection
37037 Keyboard mapping configuration
37038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37040 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 If you have for example a U.
37049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37052 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37053 can use an alternate keymap.
37054 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37059 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37060 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37061 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37064 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37071 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37076 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37077 which one you want to use.
37080 \begin_layout Standard
37081 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37082 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37083 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37087 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37088 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37089 one to support the characters you want.
37090 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37097 \begin_layout Chapter
37100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37102 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37110 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37111 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37112 topic inside the user's guide.
37115 \begin_layout Section
37117 \begin_inset Index idx
37120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37129 \begin_layout Standard
37134 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37137 \begin_layout Subsection
37141 \begin_layout Standard
37142 Creates a new document.
37145 \begin_layout Subsection
37149 \begin_layout Standard
37150 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37151 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37152 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37155 \begin_layout Subsection
37159 \begin_layout Standard
37163 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37168 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37169 Click there on a file to open it.
37172 \begin_layout Subsection
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 Closes the current document.
37180 \begin_layout Subsection
37184 \begin_layout Standard
37185 Closes all opened documents.
37188 \begin_layout Subsection
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37193 Saves the actual document.
37196 \begin_layout Subsection
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37204 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_layout Standard
37209 Saves all opened documents.
37212 \begin_layout Subsection
37216 \begin_layout Standard
37217 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37220 \begin_layout Subsection
37224 \begin_layout Standard
37225 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37226 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37227 It is described in the section
37229 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37234 Additional Features
37239 \begin_layout Subsection
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37244 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37245 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37247 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37248 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37252 \begin_layout Standard
37253 When using the menu entry
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37261 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37278 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37279 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37282 \begin_layout Subsection
37284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37286 name "subsec:Export"
37293 \begin_layout Standard
37294 You can export your document to various file formats.
37295 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37297 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37298 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37299 during its configuration.
37302 \begin_layout Standard
37303 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37311 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37318 \begin_layout Description
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37327 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37332 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37333 \begin_inset Newline newline
37336 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37337 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37341 \begin_layout Description
37342 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37348 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37353 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37359 \begin_layout Description
37360 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37361 's native DVI-format.
37362 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37363 files paths or file names in your document.
37365 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37372 \begin_layout Description
37373 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37374 in files paths or file names
37377 \begin_layout Description
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37386 ) DVI-format using the program
37388 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37391 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37411 \begin_layout Description
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37416 (cropped) the same as
37420 but with cropped page margins.
37423 \begin_layout Description
37425 \begin_inset space ~
37428 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37432 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37437 \begin_layout Description
37441 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37449 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37457 \begin_layout Description
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37466 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37470 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37478 \begin_layout Description
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37491 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37492 source that is compilable with the program
37494 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37498 \begin_layout Description
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37507 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37508 source, additionally all images used in the document
37509 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37513 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37516 \begin_layout Description
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37525 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37526 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37527 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37535 \begin_layout Description
37539 \begin_inset space ~
37548 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37549 source that is compilable with the program
37555 \begin_layout Description
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37561 \begin_inset space ~
37568 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37569 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37575 \begin_layout Description
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37580 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37581 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37587 \begin_inset space \space{}
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37611 represent the version number)
37614 \begin_layout Description
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37623 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37624 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37625 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37629 \begin_layout Description
37630 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37631 's internal XHTML engine
37634 \begin_layout Description
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37651 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37656 For the conversion the program
37665 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37668 \begin_layout Description
37669 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37674 \begin_layout Description
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37679 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37681 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37684 For the conversion the program
37693 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37696 \begin_layout Description
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37701 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37702 For the conversion the program
37711 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37714 \begin_layout Description
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37719 (cropped) the same as
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37727 but with cropped page margins
37730 \begin_layout Description
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37739 PDF-format using the program
37743 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37746 \begin_layout Description
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37767 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37772 \begin_inset space \space{}
37775 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37779 \begin_layout Description
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37788 PDF-format using the program
37790 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37793 , produces PDF-files directly
37796 \begin_layout Description
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37805 PDF-format using the program
37809 , produces PDF-files directly
37812 \begin_layout Description
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37821 PDF-format using the program
37825 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37828 \begin_layout Description
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37837 PDF-format using the program
37842 , produces PDF-files directly
37845 \begin_layout Description
37849 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_layout Description
37861 \begin_inset space ~
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37870 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37871 and then exported as text using the program
37876 \begin_layout Description
37881 PostScript format using the program
37889 options see section
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37896 reference "subsec:General-output"
37903 \begin_layout Description
37904 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37905 source and also code in the statistical programming
37919 it is possible to use
37923 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37927 \begin_layout Standard
37928 If one of the menu entries
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37944 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37946 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37954 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37959 \begin_inset Index idx
37962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37972 \begin_layout Subsection
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37977 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37978 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37987 reference "sec:Paths"
37992 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38001 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38002 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38003 's preferences as described in section
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "subsec:Converters"
38017 \begin_layout Subsection
38018 New and Close Window
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38022 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38026 \begin_layout Subsection
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38031 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38034 \begin_layout Section
38036 \begin_inset Index idx
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 Described in section
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38060 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38068 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38072 Described in section
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38079 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38086 \begin_layout Subsection
38090 \begin_layout Standard
38091 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38092 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38095 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 Selects the whole document.
38103 \begin_layout Subsection
38104 Find & Replace (Quick)
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38108 Described in section
38109 \begin_inset space ~
38113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38115 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38122 \begin_layout Subsection
38123 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38126 \begin_layout Standard
38127 Described in section
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38134 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38141 \begin_layout Subsection
38142 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38155 Described in section
38156 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38162 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38169 \begin_layout Subsection
38171 \begin_inset Index idx
38174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38175 Paragraph ! Settings
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38185 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38191 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38198 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38200 \begin_inset space ~
38208 \begin_layout Subsection
38209 Table and Rows & Columns
38212 \begin_layout Standard
38213 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38214 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38215 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38218 \begin_layout Subsection
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38223 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38224 It will dissolve this inset.
38225 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38229 \begin_layout Subsection
38233 \begin_layout Standard
38234 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38235 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38238 \begin_layout Subsection
38239 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38245 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38246 \begin_inset space ~
38250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38252 reference "sec:Nesting"
38257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38259 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38266 \begin_layout Subsection
38269 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38273 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38274 nts of the same type.
38276 \begin_inset space ~
38280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38282 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38286 for an explanation.
38289 \begin_layout Section
38291 \begin_inset Index idx
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38303 \begin_layout Standard
38304 At the bottom of the
38308 menu the opened documents are listed.
38311 \begin_layout Subsection
38312 Open/Close all Insets
38315 \begin_layout Standard
38316 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38319 \begin_layout Subsection
38320 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38323 \begin_layout Standard
38324 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38328 Math macros are described in the
38335 \begin_layout Subsection
38339 \begin_layout Standard
38340 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38341 \begin_inset space ~
38345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38347 reference "sec:Navigating"
38352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38354 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38361 \begin_layout Subsection
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38366 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38374 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38381 \begin_layout Subsection
38385 \begin_layout Standard
38386 Opens a window showing console messages.
38387 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38392 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38393 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38394 is processing the document.
38397 \begin_layout Subsection
38399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38401 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38406 \begin_inset Index idx
38409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 \begin_layout Standard
38419 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38421 All toolbars and the
38424 \begin_inset space ~
38429 can be turned on and off.
38434 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38446 \begin_inset space ~
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38463 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38467 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38474 \begin_layout Standard
38479 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38483 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38484 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38485 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38486 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38487 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38490 \begin_layout Standard
38492 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38499 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38506 \begin_layout Subsection
38510 \begin_layout Standard
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38522 \begin_inset space ~
38526 \begin_inset space ~
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38539 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38540 's main window vertically while
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38555 \begin_inset space ~
38559 \begin_inset space ~
38563 \begin_inset space ~
38568 will split it horizontally.
38569 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38570 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38571 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38572 three or more documents at the same time.
38573 To close a split view, use the menu
38576 \begin_inset space ~
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38588 \begin_layout Subsection
38592 \begin_layout Standard
38593 Closes a split view.
38596 \begin_layout Subsection
38600 \begin_layout Standard
38601 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38602 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38603 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38604 's main window fullscreen.
38605 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38606 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38609 \begin_layout Section
38611 \begin_inset Index idx
38614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 \begin_layout Subsection
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38629 \begin_inset space ~
38633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38635 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38646 \begin_layout Subsection
38648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38650 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38658 Here you can insert the following characters:
38661 \begin_layout Description
38666 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38669 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38670 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38671 -packages you have installed.
38672 You can get a complete display by checking
38675 \begin_inset space ~
38681 \begin_inset Newline newline
38685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38693 Not all characters will be visible in the
38697 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38698 dialog (see section
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38705 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38709 ) can display every character.
38717 \begin_layout Description
38718 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38722 \begin_layout Description
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38728 \begin_inset space ~
38731 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38738 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38745 \begin_layout Description
38747 \begin_inset space ~
38750 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38754 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38760 \begin_layout Description
38762 \begin_inset space ~
38765 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38769 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38775 \begin_layout Description
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38784 \begin_layout Description
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38789 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38793 \begin_layout Description
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38798 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38804 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38810 \begin_layout Description
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38815 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38819 \begin_layout Description
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38825 \begin_inset Index idx
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 \begin_inset Index idx
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38844 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38845 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38847 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38853 \begin_inset Index idx
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 \begin_inset Newline newline
38867 More information about this feature can be found in the
38873 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38879 \begin_layout Description
38880 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38882 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38883 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38887 \begin_layout Subsection
38891 \begin_layout Standard
38892 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38895 \begin_layout Description
38896 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38897 \begin_inset script superscript
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 \begin_layout Description
38909 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38910 \begin_inset script subscript
38912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38921 \begin_layout Description
38923 \begin_inset space ~
38926 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38927 \begin_inset space ~
38931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38933 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38940 \begin_layout Description
38942 \begin_inset space ~
38945 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38946 \begin_inset space ~
38950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38952 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38959 \begin_layout Description
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38964 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38971 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38978 \begin_layout Description
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38983 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38989 \begin_inset space \space{}
38992 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38993 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39002 To insert a fraction use the command
39007 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39011 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39020 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39027 \begin_layout Description
39029 \begin_inset space ~
39032 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39039 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39046 \begin_layout Description
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39051 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39052 \begin_inset space ~
39056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39058 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39065 \begin_layout Description
39067 \begin_inset space ~
39070 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39077 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39084 \begin_layout Description
39085 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39092 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39099 \begin_layout Description
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39104 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39105 \begin_inset space ~
39109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39111 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39118 \begin_layout Description
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39123 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39124 \begin_inset space ~
39128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39130 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39137 \begin_layout Description
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39146 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39155 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39162 for a usage example.
39165 \begin_layout Description
39167 \begin_inset space ~
39171 \begin_inset space ~
39174 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39175 \begin_inset space ~
39179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39181 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39188 \begin_layout Description
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39193 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39194 as described in section
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39201 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39208 \begin_layout Description
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39213 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39220 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39227 \begin_layout Description
39229 \begin_inset space ~
39232 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39233 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39235 \begin_inset space ~
39239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39241 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39248 \begin_layout Description
39250 \begin_inset space ~
39253 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39254 \begin_inset space ~
39258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39260 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39267 \begin_layout Description
39269 \begin_inset space ~
39273 \begin_inset space ~
39276 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39277 \begin_inset space ~
39281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39283 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39290 \begin_layout Subsection
39294 \begin_layout Standard
39295 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39320 are described in section
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39327 reference "sec:toc"
39336 is described in section
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39343 reference "sec:Index"
39351 is described in section
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39358 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39364 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39367 is described in section
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39374 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39381 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 \begin_layout Standard
39386 To insert floats, as described in section
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39393 reference "sec:Floats"
39397 and in detail the chapter
39404 \begin_inset space ~
39412 \begin_layout Subsection
39416 \begin_layout Standard
39417 To insert notes, described in section
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39424 reference "sec:Notes"
39431 \begin_layout Subsection
39435 \begin_layout Standard
39436 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39438 Branches are described in section
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39445 reference "sec:Branches"
39452 \begin_layout Subsection
39456 \begin_layout Standard
39457 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39458 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39460 An example is the document class
39461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39468 with three custom insets.
39471 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39475 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39481 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39484 \begin_layout Subsection
39486 \begin_inset Index idx
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39501 For more information see chapter
39503 External Document Parts
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_layout Subsection
39514 \begin_inset Index idx
39517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39526 \begin_layout Standard
39527 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39528 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39543 \begin_layout Subsection
39547 \begin_layout Standard
39552 dialog as described in section
39553 \begin_inset space ~
39557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39559 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39566 \begin_layout Subsection
39570 \begin_layout Standard
39575 as described in section
39576 \begin_inset space ~
39580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39582 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39589 \begin_layout Subsection
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39598 as described in section
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39605 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39612 \begin_layout Subsection
39614 \begin_inset Index idx
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39624 \begin_inset Index idx
39627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39628 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39636 \begin_layout Standard
39637 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39638 Floats are described in section
39639 \begin_inset space ~
39643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39645 reference "sec:Floats"
39649 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39651 Multi-page Captions
39656 \begin_inset space ~
39664 \begin_layout Subsection
39668 \begin_layout Standard
39669 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39670 \begin_inset space ~
39674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39676 reference "sec:Index"
39683 \begin_layout Subsection
39687 \begin_layout Standard
39688 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39695 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39702 \begin_layout Subsection
39706 \begin_layout Standard
39707 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39708 Tables are described in section
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39715 reference "sec:Tables"
39719 and in detail in the chapter
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_layout Subsection
39738 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Graphics are described in section
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39751 reference "sec:Graphics"
39758 \begin_layout Subsection
39762 \begin_layout Standard
39763 Inserts a URL as described in section
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39770 reference "subsec:URLs"
39777 \begin_layout Subsection
39781 \begin_layout Standard
39782 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39789 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39796 \begin_layout Subsection
39800 \begin_layout Standard
39801 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39808 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39815 \begin_layout Subsection
39819 \begin_layout Standard
39820 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39827 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39834 \begin_layout Subsection
39838 \begin_layout Standard
39839 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39840 title or caption of a float.
39841 Inserts a short title as described in section
39842 \begin_inset space ~
39846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39848 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39855 \begin_layout Subsection
39860 \begin_layout Standard
39861 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39862 Code box as described in section
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39869 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39876 \begin_layout Subsection
39878 \begin_inset Index idx
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 \begin_layout Standard
39891 Inserts a program listings box.
39892 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39894 Program Code Listings
39899 \begin_inset space ~
39907 \begin_layout Subsection
39911 \begin_layout Standard
39912 Inserts the actual date.
39913 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39918 \begin_layout Subsection
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39930 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39937 \begin_layout Section
39939 \begin_inset Index idx
39942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39951 \begin_layout Standard
39952 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39956 of the current document.
39957 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39960 \begin_layout Subsection
39964 \begin_layout Standard
39965 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39966 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39967 to jump, for example, between section
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39972 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39976 2.5 and use the submenu
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39990 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40006 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40010 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40016 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40019 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40022 \begin_layout Standard
40023 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40032 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40040 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40043 \begin_layout Subsection
40044 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40047 \begin_layout Standard
40048 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40052 \begin_layout Subsection
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40057 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40058 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40059 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_layout Subsection
40079 \begin_layout Standard
40080 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40083 The \SpecialChar LyX
40084 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40099 manual for a detailed description.
40102 \begin_layout Section
40104 \begin_inset Index idx
40107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40116 \begin_layout Subsection
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40121 Change Tracking is described in section
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40128 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40135 \begin_layout Subsection
40143 \begin_layout Standard
40144 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40145 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40146 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40148 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40149 to the clipboard or update the view.
40150 \begin_inset Newline newline
40153 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40157 \begin_layout Standard
40160 Open Containing Directory
40162 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40163 's temporary folder for the document.
40164 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40165 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40166 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40167 For example some journals require to send the
40171 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40175 \begin_layout Subsection
40176 Start Appendix Here
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40181 as described in section
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40188 reference "sec:Appendices"
40195 \begin_layout Subsection
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40205 default output format for the document (menu
40207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40209 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40227 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40231 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40240 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40245 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40263 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40267 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40268 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40270 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40271 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40276 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40281 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40291 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40296 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40297 when it is first configured.
40298 The default output format is
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_layout Subsection
40310 View (Other Formats)
40313 \begin_layout Standard
40314 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40315 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40316 actual document with an external program.
40317 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40318 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40319 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40321 All possible formats are listed in section
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40328 reference "subsec:Export"
40333 You should at least see the menu entry
40338 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40340 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40348 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40353 \begin_inset Index idx
40356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40357 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40366 \begin_layout Standard
40367 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40368 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40370 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40371 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40373 \begin_inset space ~
40376 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40378 \begin_inset space ~
40381 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40391 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40396 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40397 when it is first configured.
40400 \begin_layout Subsection
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40409 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40410 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40413 \begin_layout Subsection
40414 Update (Other Formats)
40417 \begin_layout Standard
40418 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40419 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40422 \begin_layout Subsection
40423 View Master Document
40426 \begin_layout Standard
40427 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40448 manual for more information on this topic).
40449 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40450 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40463 generates the output of the whole book, while
40467 will just output the chapter alone.
40470 \begin_layout Standard
40471 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40472 in the document settings (menu
40474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40475 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40476 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40494 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40498 ) or in the preferences (menu
40500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40501 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40506 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40511 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40529 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40536 \begin_layout Subsection
40537 Update Master Document
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40541 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40562 manual for more information on this topic).
40563 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40564 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40569 in the document settings (menu
40571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40573 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40591 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40595 ) or in the preferences (menu
40597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40608 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40626 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40633 \begin_layout Subsection
40635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40637 name "subsec:Compressed"
40644 \begin_layout Standard
40645 Un/compresses the current document.
40646 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40647 compression (see the
40649 Additional Features
40651 manual for details).
40654 \begin_layout Subsection
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40662 \begin_layout Subsection
40666 \begin_layout Standard
40667 The document settings are described in appendix
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40681 \begin_layout Section
40683 \begin_inset Index idx
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40695 \begin_layout Subsection
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40700 Spell checking is explained in section
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40707 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40714 \begin_layout Subsection
40718 \begin_layout Standard
40719 The thesaurus is described in section
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40726 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40733 \begin_layout Subsection
40735 \begin_inset Index idx
40738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40745 \begin_inset Index idx
40748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40757 \begin_layout Standard
40758 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40759 the highlighted document part.
40762 \begin_layout Subsection
40768 \begin_inset Index idx
40771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40772 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40782 Generates with the help of the program
40784 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40787 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40788 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40789 This feature is not available on Windows.
40792 \begin_layout Subsection
40798 \begin_inset Index idx
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40811 \begin_layout Standard
40812 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40822 to see the full filename paths.
40825 \begin_layout Subsection
40827 \begin_inset Index idx
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40839 \begin_layout Standard
40840 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40841 files as described in section
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40848 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40855 \begin_layout Subsection
40857 \begin_inset Index idx
40860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40873 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40891 \begin_inset Index idx
40894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40895 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40906 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40907 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40908 -packages and programs it needs; see
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40916 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40923 \begin_layout Subsection
40927 \begin_layout Standard
40932 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40939 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40946 \begin_layout Section
40948 \begin_inset Index idx
40951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40960 \begin_layout Standard
40961 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40962 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40964 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40968 \begin_layout Standard
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40977 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40978 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40979 packages and classes found
40980 by \SpecialChar LyX
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40988 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40995 \begin_layout Standard
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41004 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41009 \begin_layout Section
41011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41013 name "sec:Toolbars"
41020 \begin_layout Standard
41021 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41028 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41035 \begin_layout Standard
41036 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41037 This is described in the
41039 Additional Features
41044 \begin_layout Subsection
41046 \begin_inset Index idx
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41058 \begin_layout Standard
41059 \begin_inset Graphics
41060 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41068 \begin_layout Standard
41069 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41075 \begin_layout Standard
41076 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 \begin_inset Note Note
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41097 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41102 manual for more information.
41110 \begin_layout Standard
41111 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41117 \begin_layout Standard
41118 \begin_inset Tabular
41119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41120 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41128 \begin_inset Graphics
41129 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41143 pull-down box for the environments
41156 \begin_layout Standard
41157 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41165 \begin_inset Tabular
41166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41167 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41168 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41193 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41299 arg "spelling-continuously"
41307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 Spellcheck continuously
41317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41400 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41430 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41516 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41558 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41573 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41601 Emphasize text, function of the
41603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41608 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41638 Set text to noun style, function of the
41640 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41645 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 arg "textstyle-apply"
41671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 Format text using the current settings in the
41677 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41682 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41715 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41726 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41735 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 arg "tabular-insert"
41771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41805 Toggle outline window on/off,
41807 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41823 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41835 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41850 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41862 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41875 \begin_layout Subsection
41877 \begin_inset Index idx
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41890 \begin_inset Graphics
41891 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41899 \begin_layout Standard
41900 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41906 \begin_layout Standard
41907 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41911 \begin_layout Standard
41912 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41918 \begin_layout Standard
41919 \begin_inset Tabular
41920 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41921 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41922 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41923 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41960 arg "layout Enumerate"
41968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41987 arg "layout Itemize"
41995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 arg "layout Description"
42049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42068 arg "depth-increment"
42076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42082 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 arg "depth-decrement"
42114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42144 arg "float-insert figure"
42152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42159 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42175 arg "float-insert table"
42183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42190 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42197 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42330 arg "nomencl-insert"
42338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42364 arg "footnote-insert"
42372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42394 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42443 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42463 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42557 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42588 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42603 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42623 arg "dialog-show character"
42631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42642 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 arg "layout-paragraph"
42666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42672 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42683 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42692 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42720 \begin_layout Subsection
42721 View/Update Toolbar
42722 \begin_inset Index idx
42725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42726 Toolbar ! View / Update
42734 \begin_layout Standard
42735 \begin_inset Graphics
42736 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42750 \begin_layout Standard
42751 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42756 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42762 \begin_layout Standard
42763 \begin_inset Tabular
42764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42765 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42766 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 arg "buffer-update"
42815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42837 arg "master-buffer-view"
42845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42853 \begin_inset space ~
42862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42871 arg "master-buffer-update"
42879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42909 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42925 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42926 Synchronize with Output
42932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42956 View (Other Formats)
42962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42969 arg "update-others"
42977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42984 Update (Other Formats)
42997 \begin_layout Standard
42998 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43002 \begin_layout Subsection
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43007 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43014 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43018 , the table toolbar
43019 \begin_inset Index idx
43022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43031 \begin_inset space ~
43036 manual and the math macro toolbar
43037 \begin_inset Index idx
43040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 \begin_layout Chapter
43054 The Document Settings
43055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43057 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43062 \begin_inset Index idx
43065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43066 Document ! Settings
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43083 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43084 is called with the menu
43086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43090 You can save your document settings as default with the
43092 Save as Document Defaults
43094 button in any dialog.
43095 This will create a template named
43099 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43100 when you create a new document without
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43109 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43110 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43114 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43115 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43116 to find the one you are looking for.
43117 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43118 the submenus of the dialog.
43120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43124 \begin_inset space \space{}
43128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43135 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43136 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43137 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43140 \begin_layout Section
43144 \begin_layout Standard
43145 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43147 Document classes are described in section
43148 \begin_inset space ~
43152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43154 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43166 \begin_inset space ~
43171 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43176 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43177 as a layout for a document class.
43178 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43180 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43189 \begin_layout Standard
43190 Some classes use special class options by default.
43191 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43195 and you can decide to use them or not.
43196 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43197 recommended you leave them untouched.
43202 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43203 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43208 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43210 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43216 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43217 \begin_inset Newline newline
43222 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43225 \begin_inset Newline newline
43228 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43229 distribution, see section
43234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43236 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43254 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43255 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43256 in the background if the child document
43257 is opened without its master.
43258 This way child documents are always compilable.
43259 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43275 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43286 \begin_inset Index idx
43289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43291 packages ! prettyref
43297 \begin_inset Index idx
43300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43302 packages ! refstyle
43307 for cross-references, see section
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43314 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43321 \begin_layout Section
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43326 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43327 Please refer to the section
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43338 \begin_inset space ~
43343 manual for details.
43346 \begin_layout Section
43350 \begin_layout Standard
43351 Modules are explained in section
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43358 reference "subsec:Modules"
43365 \begin_layout Section
43369 \begin_layout Standard
43371 \begin_inset space ~
43375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43377 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43384 \begin_layout Section
43388 \begin_layout Standard
43389 The document font settings are described in section
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43396 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43403 \begin_layout Section
43407 \begin_layout Standard
43408 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43425 and whether it should be a
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43433 can also be specified here.
43436 \begin_layout Standard
43437 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43438 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43439 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43441 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43447 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43450 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43451 justifies the text on screen.
43452 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43456 \begin_layout Section
43460 \begin_layout Standard
43461 This dialog is described in sections
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43468 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43475 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43482 \begin_layout Section
43486 \begin_layout Standard
43487 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43494 reference "subsec:Margins"
43501 \begin_layout Section
43503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43505 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43510 \begin_inset Index idx
43513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 Language ! Encoding
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43524 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43525 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43527 is always encoded in utf8).
43528 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43529 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43530 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43531 -command is not known for
43532 a particular character).
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43536 If you use the option
43541 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43542 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43543 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43545 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43546 exactly one encoding.
43547 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43550 \begin_layout Standard
43552 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43553 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43554 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43555 installation supports Unicode), choose
43556 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43557 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43558 is quite incomplete, so
43559 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43564 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43565 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43566 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43567 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43568 -commands is not used, because all
43569 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43570 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43571 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43572 , two new alternative engines
43573 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43575 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43577 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43580 \begin_inset space ~
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43608 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43613 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43617 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43629 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43630 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43640 The possible settings are:
43643 \begin_layout Description
43644 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43646 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43647 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43651 \begin_inset space ~
43655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43657 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43664 \begin_layout Description
43665 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43666 format you will use.
43667 In many cases this will be
43672 \begin_inset Index idx
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43683 If the newer package
43688 \begin_inset Index idx
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 packages ! polyglossia
43698 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43699 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43700 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43702 this package will be used instead of
43709 \begin_layout Description
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43722 would be more appropriate.
43725 \begin_layout Description
43726 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43727 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43731 (for German texts), type in
43734 \begin_inset Newline newline
43739 usepackage{ngerman}
43742 \begin_layout Description
43743 None will not use a language package.
43744 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43747 \begin_layout Standard
43748 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43751 \begin_layout Description
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43761 \begin_inset space ~
43768 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43774 \begin_inset Index idx
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43779 packages ! inputenc
43785 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43786 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43787 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43791 \begin_layout Description
43792 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43794 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43795 commands, which may result in a big
43796 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43797 -commands are needed.
43800 \begin_layout Description
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43809 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43812 \begin_layout Description
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43821 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43824 \begin_layout Description
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43829 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43832 \begin_layout Description
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43841 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43842 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43845 \begin_layout Description
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43854 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43858 \begin_layout Description
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43867 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43868 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43871 \begin_layout Description
43873 \begin_inset space ~
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43881 \begin_inset space ~
43884 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43891 \begin_layout Description
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43905 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43908 \begin_layout Description
43910 \begin_inset space ~
43914 \begin_inset space ~
43917 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43918 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43919 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43920 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_layout Description
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43940 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43941 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43942 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43944 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_layout Description
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43961 \begin_inset space ~
43964 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43967 \begin_layout Description
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43976 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43979 \begin_layout Description
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43988 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43996 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43999 \begin_layout Description
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44004 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44007 \begin_layout Description
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44013 \begin_inset space ~
44016 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44019 \begin_layout Description
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44031 \begin_layout Description
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44037 \begin_inset space ~
44040 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44043 \begin_layout Description
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44049 \begin_inset space ~
44055 \begin_layout Description
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44070 \begin_inset Index idx
44073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 , when using this, set the document language to
44085 \begin_layout Description
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44094 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44099 , when using this, set the document language to
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44108 \begin_layout Description
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44117 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44123 \begin_inset Index idx
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 packages ! japanese
44133 , when using this, set the document language to
44138 \begin_layout Description
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44147 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44152 , when using this, set the document language to
44157 \begin_layout Description
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44166 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44171 , when using this, set the document language to
44176 \begin_layout Description
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44181 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44184 \begin_layout Description
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44197 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44200 \begin_layout Description
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44210 \begin_inset space ~
44213 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44214 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44215 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44218 \begin_layout Description
44220 \begin_inset space ~
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44230 \begin_layout Description
44232 \begin_inset space ~
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44239 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44240 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44243 \begin_layout Description
44245 \begin_inset space ~
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44252 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44258 \begin_inset Index idx
44261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44268 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44271 \begin_layout Description
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44284 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44291 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44294 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44301 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44302 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44304 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44307 \begin_layout Description
44309 \begin_inset space ~
44313 \begin_inset space ~
44316 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44322 \begin_inset Index idx
44325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44332 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44335 \begin_layout Description
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44340 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44346 \begin_inset Index idx
44349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 packages ! inputenc
44357 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44361 \begin_layout Description
44363 \begin_inset space ~
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44375 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_layout Description
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44394 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44395 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44396 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44400 \begin_layout Description
44402 \begin_inset space ~
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44413 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44414 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44417 \begin_layout Section
44419 \begin_inset Index idx
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44429 \begin_inset Index idx
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44439 \begin_inset Index idx
44442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44443 Color ! Shaded boxes
44449 \begin_inset Index idx
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44453 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44461 \begin_layout Standard
44462 Here you can alter the font color for the
44466 (default: black), for
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44474 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44478 (default: white) and for
44481 \begin_inset space ~
44491 sets the color back to the default.
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44495 Clicking any button showing
44503 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44504 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44505 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44506 later more quickly.
44509 \begin_layout Standard
44510 Note, if you change the
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44518 font color and use the option
44521 \begin_inset space ~
44526 in the document settings under
44529 \begin_inset space ~
44534 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44541 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44548 \begin_layout Standard
44549 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44555 \begin_layout Standard
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44568 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44574 Code after a forced page break:
44577 \begin_layout Itemize
44578 For the page color:
44579 \begin_inset Newline newline
44586 pagecolor{color name}
44589 \begin_layout Itemize
44590 For the text color:
44591 \begin_inset Newline newline
44601 \begin_layout Standard
44602 You are restricted to one of
44638 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44645 \begin_inset space ~
44651 \begin_inset Newline newline
44654 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44655 names to refer to them:
44658 \begin_layout Itemize
44664 \begin_inset Newline newline
44669 page_backgroundcolor
44672 \begin_layout Itemize
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44682 \begin_inset Newline newline
44690 \begin_layout Itemize
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44700 \begin_inset Newline newline
44708 \begin_layout Itemize
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44718 \begin_inset Newline newline
44726 \begin_layout Standard
44727 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44746 \begin_layout Section
44750 \begin_layout Standard
44751 Here you can adjust the
44755 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44759 as described in section
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44766 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44773 \begin_layout Section
44777 \begin_layout Standard
44778 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44784 \begin_inset Index idx
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44789 packages ! biblatex
44799 \begin_inset Index idx
44802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 \begin_inset Index idx
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44825 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44828 Sectioned bibliography
44830 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44836 \begin_inset Index idx
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 packages ! bibtopic
44851 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44852 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44856 for the generation of the bibliography.
44857 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44858 \begin_inset space ~
44862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44864 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44871 \begin_layout Section
44875 \begin_layout Standard
44876 Here you can define the
44880 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44882 \begin_inset space ~
44886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44888 reference "sec:Index"
44895 \begin_layout Section
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44900 The PDF properties are explained in section
44901 \begin_inset space ~
44905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44907 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44914 \begin_layout Section
44918 \begin_layout Standard
44919 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44920 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44926 \begin_inset Index idx
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44941 \begin_inset Index idx
44944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 \begin_inset Index idx
44959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44971 \begin_inset Index idx
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44986 \begin_inset Index idx
44989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44991 packages ! mathdots
45001 \begin_inset Index idx
45004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45006 packages ! mathtools
45016 \begin_inset Index idx
45019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 \begin_inset Index idx
45034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45036 packages ! stackrel
45046 \begin_inset Index idx
45049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45051 packages ! stmaryrd
45061 \begin_inset Index idx
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45066 packages ! undertilde
45071 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45074 \begin_layout Description
45075 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45076 -errors in formulas,
45077 ensure that you have this enabled.
45080 \begin_layout Description
45081 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45082 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45083 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45087 \begin_layout Description
45088 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45103 \begin_layout Description
45104 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45119 \begin_layout Description
45120 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45131 \begin_layout Description
45132 mathtools is used for the math commands
45168 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45175 \begin_layout Description
45176 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45178 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45187 \begin_layout Description
45188 stackrel is used for the math command
45205 \begin_layout Description
45206 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45209 \begin_layout Description
45210 undertilde is used for the math command
45218 Accents for one Character
45227 \begin_layout Section
45231 \begin_layout Standard
45232 The float placement options are described in the section
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_layout Section
45255 \begin_layout Standard
45256 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45258 Program Code Listings
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_layout Section
45275 \begin_layout Standard
45276 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45284 set to be used and set the
45289 The itemize environment is described in section
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45296 reference "sec:Itemize"
45303 \begin_layout Standard
45304 You can furthermore specify a
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45312 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45313 command of the desired character.
45314 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45321 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45327 \begin_inset space \space{}
45331 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45341 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45342 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45345 \begin_layout Standard
45346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45354 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45355 -packages in the preamble (menu
45358 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45359 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45368 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45372 usepackage{textcomp}
45375 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45379 usepackage{amssymb}
45389 \begin_layout Section
45393 \begin_layout Standard
45394 Branches are described in section
45395 \begin_inset space ~
45399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45401 reference "sec:Branches"
45408 \begin_layout Section
45410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45412 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45419 \begin_layout Standard
45420 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45432 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45452 View Master Document
45453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45460 Update Master Document
45461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45468 menu or the toolbar.
45469 The default is set in
45471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45472 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45474 \begin_inset space ~
45477 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45487 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45494 \begin_layout Description
45496 \begin_inset space ~
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45503 Output settings for the menu
45505 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45513 For a detailed description see section
45515 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45520 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_layout Description
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45537 Options offers settings for the export format
45545 \begin_inset space ~
45550 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45551 \begin_inset space ~
45554 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45563 settings are described in detail in section
45565 Math Output in XHTML
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45579 \begin_inset space ~
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45588 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45591 \begin_layout Description
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45598 Save transient properties
45600 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45601 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45602 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45606 \begin_layout Itemize
45607 the activation of change tracking
45610 \begin_layout Itemize
45611 the output of tracked changes
45614 \begin_layout Itemize
45615 the recording of the document directory path.
45618 \begin_layout Standard
45619 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45620 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45624 \begin_layout Section
45632 \begin_layout Standard
45633 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45635 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45637 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45644 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45645 -syntax is given in section
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45652 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45659 \begin_layout Chapter
45665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45667 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45672 \begin_inset Index idx
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 \begin_layout Standard
45685 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45687 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45691 It has the following submenus.
45694 \begin_layout Section
45698 \begin_layout Subsection
45702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45703 User Interface File
45704 \begin_inset Index idx
45707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45708 Customization ! of toolbars
45714 \begin_inset Index idx
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 Customization ! of menus
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45727 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45728 interface (ui) file.
45729 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45737 \begin_layout Description
45742 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45745 \begin_layout Description
45752 the menu entries in popup context menus
45755 \begin_layout Description
45760 specifies the toolbar buttons
45763 \begin_layout Standard
45764 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45765 and edit the entries.
45768 \begin_layout Standard
45769 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45781 entries must be finished with an explicit
45806 and in the case of the
45807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45819 The syntax for the entries is:
45822 \begin_layout Standard
45823 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45852 \begin_layout Standard
45854 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45857 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45858 -functions are listed in the menu
45860 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45862 \begin_inset space ~
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45878 For example, assuming you use the menu
45880 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45883 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45887 \begin_layout Standard
45888 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45914 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45929 to have the sixth bookmark.
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45936 \begin_inset space ~
45941 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45942 's toolbar buttons.
45943 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45947 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45959 \begin_layout Standard
45962 Enable tool tips in main work area
45964 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45972 \begin_layout Standard
45977 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45978 should display in the menu
45980 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_layout Subsection
45994 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45998 \begin_layout Standard
46001 Restore window layouts and geometries
46004 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46005 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46009 \begin_layout Standard
46012 Restore cursor positions
46014 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46018 \begin_layout Standard
46021 Load opened files from last session
46023 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46027 \begin_layout Standard
46030 Clear all session information
46032 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46033 sessions (cursor positions, names
46034 of last opened documents, etc.).
46037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46041 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46046 \begin_inset Index idx
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46058 \begin_layout Standard
46061 Backup original documents when saving
46063 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46064 it was saved the last time.
46065 It is stored in the
46068 \begin_inset space ~
46074 \begin_inset space ~
46078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46080 reference "sec:Paths"
46084 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46093 The backup file has the file extension
46094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46108 \begin_layout Standard
46111 Backup documents, every
46113 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46119 Save documents compressed by default
46121 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46122 \begin_inset space ~
46126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46128 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46133 This applies to newly created documents only.
46134 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46138 Windows & work area
46141 \begin_layout Standard
46144 Open documents in tabs
46146 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46150 \begin_layout Standard
46155 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 \begin_inset space ~
46166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46168 reference "sec:Paths"
46172 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46179 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46180 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46181 of \SpecialChar LyX
46183 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46184 instance is created for each file.
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46190 Single close-tab button
46192 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46202 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46203 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46204 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46208 \begin_layout Standard
46209 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46218 before the change takes effect.
46226 \begin_layout Standard
46231 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46233 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46235 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46239 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46240 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46241 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46244 \begin_layout Subsection
46246 \begin_inset Index idx
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46258 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46265 \begin_layout Standard
46266 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46270 \begin_layout Standard
46271 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 This section only deals with the fonts
46283 the \SpecialChar LyX
46285 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46300 \begin_layout Standard
46301 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46318 (depends on the system) as its
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46337 \begin_layout Standard
46338 You can change the font size with the
46345 \begin_layout Standard
46350 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46355 points have the size of 1
46356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46366 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46371 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46376 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46377 \begin_inset space ~
46381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46383 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46390 \begin_layout Standard
46393 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46395 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46396 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46397 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46398 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46399 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46401 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46402 \begin_inset space ~
46408 \begin_layout Subsection
46410 \begin_inset Index idx
46413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46414 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46421 \begin_inset Index idx
46424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46433 \begin_layout Standard
46434 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46435 by choosing an item in the
46436 list and selecting the
46443 \begin_layout Standard
46444 By checking the option
46448 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46451 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46452 \begin_inset space ~
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46461 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46464 \begin_layout Subsection
46466 \begin_inset Index idx
46469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 \begin_layout Standard
46479 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46483 \begin_layout Standard
46488 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46489 This feature is described in section
46490 \begin_inset space ~
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46496 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46503 \begin_layout Standard
46504 Checking the option
46507 \begin_inset space ~
46511 \begin_inset space ~
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46520 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46523 \begin_layout Section
46525 \begin_inset Index idx
46528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 \begin_layout Subsection
46541 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46545 \begin_layout Standard
46548 Cursor follows scrollbar
46550 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46554 \begin_layout Standard
46555 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46556 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46557 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46560 \begin_layout Standard
46563 Scroll below end of document
46565 is self-explanatory.
46568 \begin_layout Standard
46569 In \SpecialChar LyX
46570 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46577 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46579 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46580 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46583 \begin_layout Standard
46586 Sort environments alphabetically
46588 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46594 Group environments by their category
46596 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46599 \begin_layout Standard
46604 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46619 \begin_layout Standard
46620 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46625 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46626 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46630 \begin_layout Subsection
46632 \begin_inset Index idx
46635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46642 \begin_inset Index idx
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46646 Settings ! Shortcuts
46654 \begin_layout Standard
46659 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46661 Several binding files are available, among them:
46664 \begin_layout Description
46665 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46668 \begin_layout Description
46669 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46681 \begin_layout Description
46682 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46693 \begin_layout Standard
46694 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46699 , and binding files for special languages.
46700 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46705 \begin_inset space \space{}
46709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46717 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46718 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46719 will try to use the appropriate binding
46723 \begin_layout Standard
46724 Some binding files, like
46728 , only have a limited scope.
46729 When looking at the end of the file
46733 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46736 \begin_layout Standard
46740 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46749 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46750 in the selected key binding file.
46753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46757 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46762 \begin_inset Index idx
46765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 Key Bindings ! Editing
46774 \begin_layout Standard
46775 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46776 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46777 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46778 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46781 Show key-bindings containing
46784 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46785 Insert there for example as keyword
46786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46793 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46794 functions that contain
46795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46803 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46804 All \SpecialChar LyX
46805 functions are also listed in the file
46810 that you will find in the
46817 \begin_layout Standard
46818 For example, to add the shortcut
46826 , select the function and press the
46831 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46832 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46835 \begin_layout Standard
46836 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46837 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46839 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46840 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46842 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46848 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46851 \begin_layout Standard
46852 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46854 The syntax of the entries is:
46857 \begin_layout Standard
46863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46882 \begin_layout Standard
46883 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46884 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46912 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46913 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46914 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46915 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46917 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46921 , you needed to specify it as
46926 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46929 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46932 \begin_layout Subsection
46934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46936 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46941 \begin_inset Index idx
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46951 \begin_inset Index idx
46954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46955 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46963 \begin_layout Standard
46964 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46965 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46966 provides keyboard maps.
46967 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46968 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46980 and select the keyboard map file named
46987 \begin_layout Standard
46996 keyboard map and, if you use the
47000 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47003 arg "keymap-primary"
47009 arg "keymap-secondary"
47012 respectively or toggle between them with
47015 arg "keymap-toggle"
47021 \begin_layout Standard
47022 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47039 \begin_layout Standard
47040 You can also specify the mouse
47042 Wheel scrolling speed
47045 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47049 Middle mouse button pasting
47051 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47052 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47055 \begin_layout Standard
47063 \begin_inset space ~
47067 \begin_inset space ~
47072 you can select a key for zooming.
47073 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47076 \begin_layout Subsection
47080 \begin_layout Standard
47081 Input completion is described in section
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47088 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47095 \begin_layout Section
47097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47104 \begin_inset Index idx
47107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47114 \begin_inset Index idx
47117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47126 \begin_layout Standard
47127 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47128 are normally determined during
47130 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47133 \begin_layout Description
47135 \begin_inset space ~
47138 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47139 's working directory.
47140 It is the default when you
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47159 \begin_layout Description
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47164 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47180 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47185 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47191 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47195 \begin_inset Newline newline
47199 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47212 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47220 \begin_layout Description
47222 \begin_inset space ~
47226 \begin_inset Index idx
47229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47235 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47236 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47243 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47251 will be used to save the backups.
47252 \begin_inset Newline newline
47255 Backup files have the ending
47256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47266 \begin_layout Description
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47271 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47272 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47274 \begin_inset Newline newline
47281 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47287 You can edit this file with the program
47296 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47297 in its preferences under
47300 \begin_inset space ~
47306 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47311 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47313 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47314 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47320 and \SpecialChar LyX
47321 need to be running the same time.
47322 \begin_inset Newline newline
47325 The pipe is also used for the
47329 feature, see section
47330 \begin_inset space ~
47334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47336 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47341 \begin_inset Newline newline
47344 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47345 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47346 \begin_inset Newline newline
47362 \begin_layout Description
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47367 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47370 \begin_layout Description
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47375 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47376 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47377 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47380 \begin_layout Description
47382 \begin_inset space ~
47385 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47391 You only need to specify it if you are using
47395 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47397 For \SpecialChar LyX
47402 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47406 \begin_layout Description
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47411 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47412 When \SpecialChar LyX
47413 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47414 to find it on the system.
47415 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47417 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47426 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47427 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47430 \begin_layout Description
47432 \begin_inset space ~
47435 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47436 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47437 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47438 code or in the document
47440 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47442 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47443 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47444 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47445 scanned for the input files.
47446 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47447 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47449 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47450 compilation may fail for some documents.
47453 \begin_layout Section
47457 \begin_layout Standard
47458 Here you can insert your
47467 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47469 \begin_inset space ~
47473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47475 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47479 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47482 \begin_layout Section
47484 \begin_inset Index idx
47487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47488 Language ! Settings
47494 \begin_inset Index idx
47497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47498 Settings ! Language
47506 \begin_layout Subsection
47508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47510 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47517 \begin_layout Description
47519 \begin_inset space ~
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47526 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47528 You can find its actual translation status here:
47529 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47531 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47539 \begin_layout Description
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47544 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47545 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47546 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47547 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47564 The most widespread language package is
47569 \begin_inset Index idx
47572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47579 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47581 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47582 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47583 come with the alternative
47589 \begin_inset Index idx
47592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47594 packages ! polyglossia
47599 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47600 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47606 The available selections are described in section
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47613 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47620 \begin_layout Description
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47625 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47626 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47627 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47628 An example is the start command
47634 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47636 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47640 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47656 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47661 \begin_layout Description
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47671 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47672 command toggles the package on and off.
47675 \begin_layout Description
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47684 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47688 \begin_layout Description
47690 \begin_inset space ~
47694 \begin_inset space ~
47697 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47701 \begin_layout Description
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47710 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47711 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47712 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47714 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47721 \begin_layout Description
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47726 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47728 When this option is not set, the
47731 \begin_inset space ~
47736 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47738 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47749 \begin_layout Description
47751 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47763 When it is not set, the
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47771 is set to the end of the document.
47774 \begin_layout Description
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47783 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47784 language will be underlined in blue.
47787 \begin_layout Description
47789 \begin_inset space ~
47793 \begin_inset space ~
47796 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47797 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47800 \begin_layout Description
47802 \begin_inset space ~
47805 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47806 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47807 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47808 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47811 \begin_layout Subsection
47815 \begin_layout Standard
47816 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47823 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47830 \begin_layout Section
47834 \begin_layout Subsection
47836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47838 name "subsec:General-output"
47845 \begin_layout Description
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47850 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47852 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47854 \begin_inset space ~
47860 For a detailed description see section
47862 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47867 \begin_inset space ~
47875 \begin_layout Description
47877 \begin_inset space ~
47880 Options Options for the program
47884 that is used for the export format
47889 \begin_inset space ~
47893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47895 reference "subsec:Export"
47900 Possible options are listed in the
47905 \begin_inset Newline newline
47909 \begin_inset Flex URL
47912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47914 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47924 \begin_layout Description
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47933 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47936 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47937 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47945 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47948 \begin_layout Description
47950 \begin_inset space ~
47954 \begin_inset Index idx
47957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47964 \begin_inset Index idx
47967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47968 Settings ! Date format
47973 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47974 \begin_inset Newline newline
47978 \begin_inset Flex URL
47981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47983 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47989 \begin_inset Newline newline
47992 For example the format
47993 \begin_inset Newline newline
47997 \begin_inset Newline newline
48000 prints the date as day/month/year.
48003 \begin_layout Description
48005 \begin_inset space ~
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48012 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48013 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48016 \begin_layout Subsection
48022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48024 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48029 \begin_inset Index idx
48032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48033 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48042 \begin_layout Description
48044 \begin_inset space ~
48052 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48059 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48064 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48085 are used for Cyrillic.
48086 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48099 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48101 sets up in the background.
48102 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48105 \begin_layout Description
48107 \begin_inset space ~
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48122 options They only have an effect when the program
48126 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48129 \begin_layout Standard
48130 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48131 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48132 manuals of the applications.
48135 \begin_layout Description
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48140 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48147 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48154 \begin_layout Description
48156 \begin_inset space ~
48159 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48160 \begin_inset space ~
48164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48166 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48173 \begin_layout Description
48175 \begin_inset space ~
48178 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48179 \begin_inset space ~
48183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48185 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48192 \begin_layout Description
48198 \begin_inset space ~
48201 command Command for the program
48203 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48206 that is described in the section
48208 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48213 Additional Features
48218 \begin_layout Standard
48219 There are additionally the following options:
48222 \begin_layout Description
48224 \begin_inset space ~
48228 \begin_inset space ~
48232 \begin_inset space ~
48236 \begin_inset space ~
48241 \begin_inset space ~
48244 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48262 to separate folders.
48263 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48265 \begin_inset Index idx
48268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48275 \begin_inset Index idx
48278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48287 \begin_layout Description
48289 \begin_inset space ~
48293 \begin_inset space ~
48297 \begin_inset space ~
48301 \begin_inset space ~
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48309 \begin_inset space ~
48312 changes Removes all manually set
48318 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48319 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48321 \begin_inset space ~
48326 dialog when changing the document class.
48329 \begin_layout Section
48331 \begin_inset space ~
48335 \begin_inset Index idx
48338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48347 \begin_layout Subsection
48349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48351 name "subsec:Converters"
48356 \begin_inset Index idx
48359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48368 \begin_layout Standard
48369 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48370 from one format to another.
48371 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48372 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48379 \begin_inset space ~
48384 field and press the
48389 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48393 \begin_inset space ~
48398 drop-down list, modify the
48402 field and press the
48409 \begin_layout Standard
48412 Converter File Cache
48418 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48420 Maximum Age (in days
48423 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48424 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48427 \begin_layout Standard
48428 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48429 definition, is described in the section
48440 \begin_layout Subsection
48442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48444 name "sec:File-Formats"
48449 \begin_inset Index idx
48452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48459 \begin_inset Index idx
48462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 \begin_layout Standard
48472 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48482 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48485 \begin_layout Standard
48486 You can also define the
48488 Default output format
48490 that is used when you use
48492 View, Update, View Master Document
48496 Update Master Document
48502 menu or the toolbar.
48505 \begin_layout Standard
48506 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48517 \begin_layout Standard
48518 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48520 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48521 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48522 This is done by specifying a
48527 More about this is described in the section
48538 \begin_layout Chapter
48539 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48541 \begin_inset Index idx
48544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48553 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48560 \begin_layout Standard
48562 \begin_inset space ~
48566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48568 reference "tab:Units"
48572 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48573 and used in this documentation.
48576 \begin_layout Standard
48577 \begin_inset Float table
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48584 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48610 \begin_inset Tabular
48611 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48612 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48613 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48614 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48768 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 scaled point (65536
49040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49107 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
49112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49231 % of original image width
49236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49320 \begin_layout Standard
49321 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49324 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49331 \begin_layout Bibliography
49332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49333 LatexCommand bibitem
49340 The \SpecialChar LyX
49342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49345 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49351 \begin_inset Newline newline
49355 \begin_inset Flex URL
49358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49360 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49368 \begin_layout Bibliography
49369 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49370 LatexCommand bibitem
49371 key "latexcompanion"
49376 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49378 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49379 Companion Second Edition.
49382 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49385 \begin_layout Bibliography
49386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49387 LatexCommand bibitem
49393 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49396 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49400 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49403 \begin_layout Bibliography
49404 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49405 LatexCommand bibitem
49414 : A Document Preparation System.
49417 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49420 \begin_layout Bibliography
49421 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49422 LatexCommand bibitem
49432 The \SpecialChar TeX
49436 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49439 \begin_layout Bibliography
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49441 LatexCommand bibitem
49447 The \SpecialChar TeX
49449 \begin_inset Newline newline
49453 \begin_inset Flex URL
49456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49458 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49466 \begin_layout Bibliography
49467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49468 LatexCommand bibitem
49474 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49476 \begin_inset Newline newline
49480 \begin_inset Flex URL
49483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49485 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49493 \begin_layout Bibliography
49494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49495 LatexCommand bibitem
49502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49504 name "Documentation"
49505 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49512 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49516 \begin_inset Newline newline
49520 \begin_inset Flex URL
49523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49525 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49533 \begin_layout Bibliography
49534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49535 LatexCommand bibitem
49542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49544 name "Documentation"
49545 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49550 how to use the program
49552 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49556 \begin_inset Newline newline
49560 \begin_inset Flex URL
49563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49565 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49573 \begin_layout Bibliography
49574 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49575 LatexCommand bibitem
49582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49584 name "Documentation"
49585 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49590 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49596 \begin_inset Index idx
49599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49601 packages ! biblatex
49607 \begin_inset Newline newline
49611 \begin_inset Flex URL
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49616 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49624 \begin_layout Bibliography
49625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49626 LatexCommand bibitem
49633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49635 name "Documentation"
49636 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49641 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49647 \begin_inset Index idx
49650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49658 \begin_inset Newline newline
49662 \begin_inset Flex URL
49665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49667 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49675 \begin_layout Bibliography
49676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49677 LatexCommand bibitem
49684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49686 name "Documentation"
49687 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49697 \begin_inset Newline newline
49701 \begin_inset Flex URL
49704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49706 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49714 \begin_layout Bibliography
49715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49716 LatexCommand bibitem
49717 key "makeindex-man"
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49726 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49736 \begin_inset Newline newline
49740 \begin_inset Flex URL
49743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49745 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49753 \begin_layout Bibliography
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49755 LatexCommand bibitem
49762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49764 name "Documentation"
49765 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49775 \begin_inset Newline newline
49779 \begin_inset Flex URL
49782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49784 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49792 \begin_layout Bibliography
49793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49794 LatexCommand bibitem
49801 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49803 name "Documentation"
49804 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49809 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49811 \begin_inset Newline newline
49815 \begin_inset Flex URL
49818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49820 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49828 \begin_layout Bibliography
49829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49830 LatexCommand bibitem
49837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49839 name "Documentation"
49840 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49845 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49851 \begin_inset Index idx
49854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49862 \begin_inset Newline newline
49866 \begin_inset Flex URL
49869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49871 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49879 \begin_layout Bibliography
49880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49881 LatexCommand bibitem
49888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49890 name "Documentation"
49891 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49902 \begin_inset Index idx
49905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49907 packages ! enumitem
49913 \begin_inset Newline newline
49917 \begin_inset Flex URL
49920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49922 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49930 \begin_layout Bibliography
49931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49932 LatexCommand bibitem
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49941 name "Documentation"
49942 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49947 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49953 \begin_inset Index idx
49956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49958 packages ! fancyhdr
49964 \begin_inset Newline newline
49968 \begin_inset Flex URL
49971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49973 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49981 \begin_layout Bibliography
49982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49983 LatexCommand bibitem
49990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49992 name "Documentation"
49993 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49998 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50004 \begin_inset Index idx
50007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50009 packages ! hyperref
50015 \begin_inset Newline newline
50019 \begin_inset Flex URL
50022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50024 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
50032 \begin_layout Bibliography
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50034 LatexCommand bibitem
50041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50043 name "Documentation"
50044 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
50049 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50055 \begin_inset Index idx
50058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50060 packages ! microtpye
50066 \begin_inset Newline newline
50070 \begin_inset Flex URL
50073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50075 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
50083 \begin_layout Bibliography
50084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50085 LatexCommand bibitem
50092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50094 name "Documentation"
50095 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50100 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50106 \begin_inset Index idx
50109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50117 \begin_inset Newline newline
50121 \begin_inset Flex URL
50124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50126 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50134 \begin_layout Bibliography
50135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50136 LatexCommand bibitem
50143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50145 name "Documentation"
50146 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50151 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50157 \begin_inset Index idx
50160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50162 packages ! prettyref
50168 \begin_inset Newline newline
50172 \begin_inset Flex URL
50175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50185 \begin_layout Bibliography
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50187 LatexCommand bibitem
50194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50196 name "Documentation"
50197 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50202 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50208 \begin_inset Index idx
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50213 packages ! refstyle
50219 \begin_inset Newline newline
50223 \begin_inset Flex URL
50226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50236 \begin_layout Bibliography
50237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50238 LatexCommand bibitem
50245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50248 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50253 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50255 \begin_inset Newline newline
50259 \begin_inset Flex URL
50262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50264 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50272 \begin_layout Bibliography
50273 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50274 LatexCommand bibitem
50281 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50284 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50289 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50291 \begin_inset Newline newline
50295 \begin_inset Flex URL
50298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50300 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50308 \begin_layout Bibliography
50309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50310 LatexCommand bibitem
50317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50320 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50325 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50326 for Cyrillic languages:
50327 \begin_inset Newline newline
50331 \begin_inset Flex URL
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50336 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50344 \begin_layout Bibliography
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50346 LatexCommand bibitem
50353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50356 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50361 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50363 \begin_inset Newline newline
50367 \begin_inset Flex URL
50370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50372 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50380 \begin_layout Bibliography
50381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50382 LatexCommand bibitem
50389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50392 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50397 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50399 \begin_inset Newline newline
50403 \begin_inset Flex URL
50406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50408 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50416 \begin_layout Bibliography
50417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50418 LatexCommand bibitem
50425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50428 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50433 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50435 \begin_inset Newline newline
50439 \begin_inset Flex URL
50442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50444 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50452 \begin_layout Standard
50453 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50487 \begin_inset Note Note
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50497 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50498 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50499 bibliography is the second one:
50507 \begin_layout Standard
50508 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50509 LatexCommand bibtex
50510 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50511 options "biblio/alphadin"
50518 \begin_layout Standard
50519 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50523 \begin_layout Standard
50527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50533 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50542 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50550 \begin_inset Note Note
50553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50554 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50555 \begin_inset space ~
50559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50561 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50573 \begin_layout Standard
50574 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50575 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50581 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50582 LatexCommand printindex